Mitsubishi cnc nc specification selection guide e70-m70 v-m700v series

/ /
BNP-A1225-B[ENG]
MITSUBISHI CNC
NC Specification Selection Guide
E70 / M70V / M700V Series

Manual pulse
generator RIO 2
High-performance spindle motor
SJ-D Series / SJ-DJ Series
/ SJ-V Series
Low-inertia and high-speed
spindle motor
SJ-DL Series / SJ-VL Series
Built-in spindle motor
SJ-B Series / SJ-PMB Series
Low-inertia motor
HF-KP Series
Medium-inertia motor
HF Series
Direct drive servo motor
TM-RB Series
Linear servo motor
LM-F Series
High-performance drive unit
MDS-D2/DH2 Series
Multi-hybrid drive unit
MDS-DM2 Series
Ultra-compact drive unit
with built-in power supply
MDS-DJ Series
Drive Unit
Servo Motor
Spindle Motor
Product lines
Soft Ware
Machine Operation Panel
NC Designer
NC Monitor
NC Explorer
NC Trainer/NC Trainer plus
NC Analyzer
NC Configurator2
GX Developer etc.M70V Series
RIO 1
Twin-head magnetic detector
MBA Series
Tool spindle motor
HF-KP Series / HF-SP Series
Machine
Operation Panel
E70 Series
M700VS Series M700VW Series
Twin-head magnetic detector
MBE Series
* Trademarks
MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT
and CC-Link IE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Microsoft®
and Windows®
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the respective companies.
INDEX
E70/M70V/M700V Series Lineup 3
Selection procedure 5
CNC system 6
Control Unit 6
Displays & Keyboards 7
I/O unit and others 8
General Connection Diagram 9
E70/M70V Series
M700VS Series
M700VW Series
MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel
Cables List 13
E70/M70V/M700V Series Specifications List 17
Drive system 39
Drive unit outline 39
System configuration 41
Specifications 44
Type 46
200V Servo motor/Spindle motor 50
HF Series 50
TM-RB Series 52
LM-F Series 53
SJ-D/SJ-DJ/SJ-DL Series 55
SJ-V/SJ-VL Series 60
Built-in spindle motor 67
Tool spindle motor 75
400V Servo motor/Spindle motor 78
HF-H Series 78
SJ-4-V Series 79
Drive system 81
200V MDS-D2-Vx 81
200V MDS-D2-SPx/CV 82
400V MDS-DH2 Series 83
Drive unit outline dimension drawing 84
200V MDS-DM2 Series 85
200V MDS-DJ Series 86
Selection 89
Dedicated Options 97
Selection of cables 115
List of cables 125
User Support Tools/Development Tools 131
Global Service Network 133

3 43 4
E70/M70V/M700VSeriesLineup
E70/M70V/M700VSeriesLineup
Lathe system
(Display/Control unit integrated type) (Display/Control unit separate type)
E70
Series
M70V Series M700VS Series M700VW Series
TypeB TypeA M720VS M730VS M750VS M720VW M730VW M750VW
6 9 11 12 16 12 16
3 5 9 12 16 12 16
2 3 4 4 6 4 6
2 6 6 6
1 4 4 6 4 6
3 4 4 8 4 8
3 5 8 6 8 6 8
1 1 2 2 4 2 4
– – – Available
Available Available Available Available
– – – Available
0.1µm 0.1µm 0.1µm 1nm 0.1µm 1nm
1nm 1nm 1nm 1nm
230kB
(600m)
(400)
500kB
(1,280m)
(1,000)
2,000kB
(5,120m)
(1,000)
2,000kB (5,120m) (1,000) 2,000kB (5,120m) (1,000)
8,000 steps 20,000 steps 32,000 steps 128,000 steps 128,000 steps
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
8.4-type
8.4-type/10.4-type/10.4-type
touch panel (selectable)
8.4-type/10.4-type/10.4-type touch panel/
15-type (selectable)
10.4-type/10.4-type touch panel/
15-type/15-type touch panel (selectable)
sheet keys sheet keys/clear keys (selectable) clear keys
NC Designer
– Available
Compatible
Japanese/English/German/Italian/French/Spanish/Chinese (traditional)/Chinese (simplified)/
Korean/Portuguese/Hungarian/Dutch/Swedish/Turkish/Polish/Russian/Czech
Machining center system
(Display/Control unit integrated type) (Display/Control unit separate type)
Model name
E70
Series M70V Series M700VS Series M700VW Series
TypeB TypeA M720VS M730VS M750VS M720VW M730VW M750VW
Numberofcontrolaxes
Max. number of axes
(NC axes + Spindles + PLC axes)
6 9 11 12 16 12 16
Max. number of NC axes
(in total for all the part systems)
3 5 8 8 16 8 16
Max. number of spindles 1 2 4 4
Max. number of PLC axes 2 6 6 6
Max. number of PLC indexing axes 1 4 4 6 4 6
Number of simultaneous contouring
control axes
3 4 4 8 4 8
Max. number of NC axes in a part
system
3 5 8 6 8 6 8
Max. number of part systems 1 1 2 2 2
CF card in control unit – – – Available
IC card mode
(Front IC card mode)
Available Available Available Available
Hard disk mode – – – Available
Least command increment 0.1µm 0.1µm 0.1µm 1nm 0.1µm 1nm
Least control increment 1nm 1nm 1nm 1nm
Max. program capacity
230kB
(600m)
(400)
500kB
(1,280m)
(1,000)
2,000kB
(5,120m)
(1,000)
2,000kB (5,120m) (1,000) 2,000kB (5,120m) (1,000)
Max. PLC program capacity 8,000 steps 20,000 steps 32,000 steps 128,000 steps 128,000 steps
High-speed machining mode 1 Max.
[kBPM]
– 8.4 16.8 16.8 16.8 16.8 16.8 16.8 16.8
High-speed machining mode 2 Max.
[kBPM]
– – 33.7 67.5 168 168 67.5 168 168
High-speed high-accuracy control 1 Max.
[kBPM] (1st part system only)
– 16.8 16.8 16.8 33.7 33.7 16.8 33.7 33.7
High-speed high-accuracy control 2 Max.
[kBPM] (limited to 1-part system configuration)
– – 33.7 67.5 168 168 67.5 168 168
High-accuracy control 1
(1st part system only)
– Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
SSS Control (1st part system only)
(Super Smooth Surface)
– – Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
CC-Link (Master/Slave) – Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
Display 8.4-type
8.4-type/10.4-type/10.4-type
touch panel (selectable)
8.4-type/10.4-type/10.4-type touch
panel/15-type (selectable)
10.4-type/10.4-type touch panel/
15-type/15-type touch panel (selectable)
Keyboard sheet keys sheet keys/clear keys (selectable) clear keys
HMI customization function NC Designer
Windows®
XPe – Available
MITSUBISHI CNC
Machine Operation PanelHigh
Compatible
Languages supported
Japanese/English/German/Italian/French/Spanish/Chinese (traditional)/Chinese (simplified)/
Korean/Portuguese/Hungarian/Dutch/Swedish/Turkish/Polish/Russian/Czech
* Maximum specifications including optional specifications are listed. Refer to the Specifications List for the details of each option.
E70/M70V/M700V Series Lineup

5 66
CNCsystemControlUnit
5
Selectionprocedure
Selection procedure flow chart
NC specification selection completed!
Start selecting the NC specifications!
Check the machine type and specifications
· Machine type: lathe / machining center / grinding machine / special-purpose machine, etc.
· Details of control, required accuracy, with/without auxiliary axes (for workpiece feeding, turret, etc.)
STEP 1
Decide the NC specifications
· Number of axes, axis configuration, number of part systems, with/without spindles, number of I/O points
· Check the position detection method and detection performance (absolute/relative position, number of pulses)
· Select the size of the display unit, keyboard
STEP 2 P3
Decide the servo motor
· Select the servo motor capacity
· Check the outline dimensions, detector, and whether it has a scale or break
STEP 3 P50
Decide the spindle motor
· Check the spindle's base/maximum rotation speed, output, torque, outline dimensions and whether it has a keyway
· Frame-type or built-in spindle motor
· With/without optional specifications (orientation, spindle/C-axis, synchronization, etc.)
· Check the C axis accuracy and the speed (when C axis is used)
STEP 4 P55
Decide the drive unit
· Check the capacity and the dimensions of a drive unit
· Check the power regeneration/resistor regeneration
· Select the power supply unit only when a power regenerative drive unit is used.
STEP 5 P81
Decide the power supply unitSTEP 6 P89
Decide the software options
· Check the number of programs stored (memory capacity), number of variable sets, etc.
· Check the required functions
STEP 8 P17
Check the development tools
· Check the screen development tool (when screen customization is required)
STEP 9 P131
Decide the hardware options
· Check the options
(manual pulse generator, synchronous encoder, availability of network connection and PLC connection, etc.)
· Check the required cables and connectors. (In some cases, customers may need to prepare cables and connectors themselves.)
STEP 7 P7,P13,P115
Selection procedure CNC system Control Unit
[mm]
Type Name Contents
260
140
FCU7-KB921
MITSUBISHI CNC
Machine Operation
Panel A
(Standard
specification)
Key switch 55 points, LED 55 points
MITSUBISHI standard key layout
260
140
FCU7-KB922
MITSUBISHI CNC
Machine Operation
Panel A
(Custom
specification)
Key switch 55 points, LED 55 points
Without key tops (purchase custom parts separately)
140
140
FCU7-KB926
MITSUBISHI CNC
Machine Operation
Panel B
Rotary switches (spindle override, cutting override)
Select switch (memory protection)
Emergency stop push-button
The internal components of the machine operation panel are protected against water and oil (IP65F).
Control Unit
MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel
Handy Terminal
E70 Series M70V Series M700VS Series M700VW Series
Integrated type
(Placed on the back of display)
Separate type
(Placed separately from the
display unit)
[mm]
Type Contents
133
255
HG1T-SB12UH-MK1346-L5
LCD (Monochrome display with backlight)
Emergency stop button
Manual pulse generator
LED 10 points
Membrane switch (key)
Enable switch
The internal components of the panels are protected against water and oil (IP65F).
Possible to connect with the M700VW Series only.

7 88
CNCsystemI/Ounitandothers
7
CNCsystemDisplaysKeyboards
CNC system Displays Keyboards
Classification Type Remarks
Supported model
E70 M70V M700VS M700VW
[Operation panel I/O unit]
DI 24V/0V
common input
DO Source output FCU7-DX621
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type AO: 1 point MPG:2ch
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8 RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
s − − −
FCU7-DX711
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type MPG:2ch
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 7, 8 RIO3 extensible stations: 3, 4, 5, 6
s s s −
FCU7-DX721
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 80-points source type AO: 1 point MPG:2ch
s s s −
FCU7-DX731
s s s −
DO Sink output FCU7-DX710
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points sink type MPG:2ch
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 7, 8 RIO3 extensible stations: 3, 4, 5, 6
− s s −
FCU7-DX720
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 80-points sink type AO: 1 point MPG:2ch
− s s −
FCU7-DX730
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 96-points sink type MPG: 2ch
− s s −
[Operation panel I/O unit]
DI 24V/0V
common input
DO Source output FCU7-DX671
Occupied stations DI/DO: Select 1 station from between 1 and 6 MPG: 7, 8 (fixed)
RIO3 extensible stations: Unselected stations between 1 and 6
− − − s
FCU7-DX771
Occupied stations DI/DO: Select 2 stations from between 1 and 6 MPG: 7, 8 (fixed)
− − − s
DO Sink output FCU7-DX670
Occupied stations DI/DO: Select 1 station from between 1 and 6 MPG: 7, 8 (fixed)
− − − s
FCU7-DX770
Occupied stations DI/DO: Select 2 stations from between 1 and 6 MPG: 7, 8 (fixed)
− − − s
[Remote I/O unit]
DI 24V/0V
common input
DO Source output FCUA-DX101
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type (photo coupler insulation)
DO: 32-points source type (non-insulation) Number of occupied stations: 1
s s s s
FCUA-DX111
DO: 48-points source type (non-insulation) Number of occupied stations: 2
s s s s
Analog output FCUA-DX121
DO: 48-points source type (non-insulation) AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
s s s s
Analog
input/output
FCUA-DX141
DO: 32-points source type (non-insulation) AI: 4 points AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
s s s s
DO Sink output FCUA-DX100
DO: 32-points sink type (non-insulation) Number of occupied stations: 1
− s s s
FCUA-DX110
DO: 48-points sink type (non-insulation) Number of occupied stations: 2
− s s s
Analog output FCUA-DX120
DO: 48-points sink type (non-insulation) AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
− s s s
Analog
input/output
FCUA-DX140
DO: 32-points sink type (non-insulation) AI: 4 points AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
− s s s
[Scan I/O card]
Source type HR357 Scan DI/DO = 64 points/64 points DI/DO = 32 points/32 points − s s s
Sink type HR347 Scan DI/DO = 64 points/64 points DI/DO = 32 points/32 points − s s s
[External power supply unit]
External power supply with power supply
ON/OFF function
PD25 Input 200VAC Output 24VDC (3A) s s s s
External power supply with power supply
ON/OFF function
PD27 Input 200 to 400VAC Output 24VDC (8A) − − − s
[Manual pulse generator]
5V Manual pulse generator UFO-01-2Z9 Input 5VDC 100pulse/rev s s s s
12V Manual pulse generator HD60C Input 12VDC 25pulse/rev s s s s
[Encoder]
Synchronous feed encoder OSE1024-3-15-68 Input 5VDC 1024pulse/rev s s s s
[Expansion Unit]
Expansion unit × 1slot FCU7-EX891 One expansion card HN5xx can be mounted additionally. − − − s
[Expansion Card]
PROFIBUS-DP FCU7-HN571 PROFIBUS-DP × 1ch − − − s
CC-Link FCU7-HN576 CC-Link × 1ch − − − s
CC-Link FCU7-HN577 CC-Link × 2ch − − − s
[CC-Link unit]
CC-Link FCU7-HN746 CC-Link × 1ch − s s −
[External PLC Link]
DeviceNet/FL-net FCU7-HN747 DeviceNet/FL-net − − s −
[Memory expansion unit]
Memory expansion FCU7-HN754 Memory expansion − s − −
[Optical communication repeater unit]
Optical communication repeater unit FCU7-EX022 Using up to two units, relay of the total length of up to 90m can be performed. − s s s
[MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel]
MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A
FCU7-KB921 Mitsubishi standard 55 key Key switch 55 points, LED 55 points s s s s
FCU7-KB922 Customized 55 key Key switch 55 points, LED 55 point (a key top set is separately required) s s s s
MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel B FCU7-KB926 Rotary switches (spindle override, cutting override), Select switch (memory protection), Emergency stop push-button s s s s
Clear key top set N030C975G51 A set of transparent key tops (20 pieces) s s s s
Optional key top set A N030C975G52 A set of key tops marked with 20 identifiable characters such as axis name and part system numbers for additional functions s s s s
[Function expansion unit]
Function expansion FCU7-HN721 Normal option (Graphic check/trace rotary axis drawing) − s*1
− −
Function expansion FCU7-HN722 Full option (Graphic check/trace rotary axis drawing, SSS control) − s*1
− −
DI: Digital input signals, DO: Digital output signals, AI: Analog input signals, AO: Analog output signals
*1 M70V TypeA only. To use a function expansion unit, only one of the two can be selected: FCU7-HN746 or FCU7-HN754. (Up to 2 units including an expansion unit)
List of UnitsDisplays Keyboards
[mm]
E70 Series
Display
Keyboard
FCU7-DU120-13
8.4-type
FCU7-KB024
sheet keys
FCU7-KB025
sheet keys for lathe
system
ONG layout
260
200
8.4-type
140
M70V/M700VS Series
Display
Keyboard
FCU7-DU120-12 (M70V)
FCU7-DU120-11 (M700VS)
8.4-type
Display
Keyboard
FCU7-DU140-12 (M70V)
FCU7-DU140-11 (M700VS)
10.4-type
FCU7-DU140-32 (M70V)
FCU7-DU140-31 (M700VS)
10.4-type touch panel
FCU7-DU180-11 (M700VS)
15-type
FCU7-KB024
sheet keys
FCU7-KB025
sheet keys for lathe
system
ONG layout
260
200
8.4-type
140
FCU7-KB044
sheet keys
ONG layout
10.4-type
290
220
140
10.4-type
touch panel
290
220
140
–
FCU7-KB026
clear keys
FCU7-KB028
clear keys for lathe
system
ONG layout
260
200
8.4-type
140
FCU7-KB046
clear keys
ONG layout
10.4-type
290
220
140
10.4-type
touch panel
290
220
140
–
– –
FCU7-KB048
clear keys
ABC layout
10.4-type
290
220
230
10.4-type
touch panel
290
220
230
15-type
400
320
220
230
FCU7-KB029
sheet keys
ONG layout
260
200
8.4-type
140
FCU7-KB047
clear keys
Full keyboard
10.4-type
290
220160
10.4-type
touch panel
290
220160
160
290
15-type
400
320
(Note) 15-type display is available with M700VS only. There are restrictions on the keyboard location imposed due to the maximum length of the G011/G012 cable.
M700VW Series
Display
Keyboard
FCU7-DA646-11
10.4-type
FCU7-DA646-33
10.4-type touch panel
FCU7-DA636-11
15-type
FCU7-DA636-33
15-type touch panel
FCU7-KB041
clear keys
ABC layout
10.4-type
290
220
230
10.4-type
touch panel
290
220
230
15-type
400
320
220
230
220
230
15-type
touch panel
400
320
FCU7-KB045
clear keys
Full keyboard
10.4-type
290
220160
10.4-type
touch panel
290
220160
160
290
15-type
400
320
160
290
400
320
15-type
touch panel
The internal components of the keyboard are protected against water and oil (IP65F). The interface for USB memory and CF card are mounted on the front panel of the display for E70/
M70V/M700VS Series. The interface for USB memory and PCMCIA 2 are mounted on the front panel of the display for M700VW Series.
CNC system I/O unit and others

9 109 10
CNCsystemGeneralConnectionDiagram
CNC system General Connection Diagram
E70/M70V Series
L1 L2 L3
FG
EMG
SIO
LCD
1ch: F034
LAN
EMG
OPT
FRONT
CG71SKIP ENC
USER 2ch
1ch
INV
F120
FCUA-R030
G395/G396/G380
FCUA-R050/054
RIO1
MENU
2ch: F035
1ch
HN7xx
HN4xx
F480/G488
G300/G301
2ch
ENC
5V:G023/G024
D-AL
MC
ON OFF
MC
MC
MC
DCOUT
FG
ACIN
DCIN
F070
CP/NFB
CP/NFB
FCU7-DU1xx-xx
HN244
TESTIN
TPIN
TEST
FCU7-KB0xx
RIO2
NCKB
CG3x
RIO1
FCU7-DXxxx
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
2ch
12V:F320/F321
5V:F023/F024
G011
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
FCUA-R211
/SH41
CG71
max.0.5m
G402
RIO3 MPG
DI-L/R
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
FCUA-R211
/SH41
FCUA-R211
/SH41
F351
DI-L/R
FCUA-
R300
/R301
FCUA-
R300
/R301
F070
F070 F070
AO
F221
max.30m
Select
FCU7-MU55x
Front
memory
I/F card
USB
memory
I/F
CF card
I/F
Max. 8 points
24VDC
Spindle motor
General-purpose
inverter
24VDC
The name with brackets indicates the cable for the unit.
Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared by the machine tool builder.
No-fuse breaker (NFB)
Synchronous feed
encoder
Manual pulse
generator
Drive units
Skip signal input
RS232C device
CNC control unit
24VDC stabilized
power supply
AC reactor
Contactor
Circuit protector (CP)
Remote I/O unit
Machine
control relay/
contact
To the next remote I/O
or terminator
Machine
control relay/
contact
Remote I/O unitRemote I/O unit
Machine operation panel
made by the machine tool builder
Menu keys
Display unit
Backlight
inverter
(Note1)
Expansion card
(Option)
Memory card
Main card HN76x
or terminator
24VDC 24VDC
Operation panel I/O unit
Keyboard unit
8.4-type:F480/G488
10.4-type:G482/G484 (Note1)
10.4-type:G098/G492 (Note1)
8.4-type:G097/G497
Ethernet device
(Note3)
(Note2)
(Note 1) M70V Series only
(Note 2) Touch panels only
(Note 3) With analog spindle configuration
(Note 4) For a connection of the MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel, refer to “Connection of MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel” to be described.
(Note 5) For connections of the drive units, refer to “Drive system System configuration drawing” to be described.
M700VS Series
FCU7-KB0xx
RIO2
EMG
SIO1
NCKB
Manual pulse
generator
CG3x
RIO1
or terminator
OPT1
Operation panel
I/O unit
FCU7-DX7xx
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
RIO1SKIP ENC
12V: F320/F321
5V: F023/F024
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
CG71
24VDC 24VDC
FCUA-R211
/SH41
CG71
G011/G012
RIO3 MPG
or terminator
DI-L/R
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
24VDC
FCUA-R211
/SH41
FCUA-R211
/SH41
F351
DI-L/R
FCUA-
R300
/R301
FCUA-
R300
/R301
F070
F070 F070
RIO2RIO1
or terminator
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
FCUA-DX1xx
24VDC 24VDC
FCUA-R211
/SH41
DI-L/R
F070 F070
CG72OPT2
DI-L/R
DI-L/R
SIO2
(*RIO2)
LCD
INV
MENU
FRONT
USB
memory I/F
CF card
I/F
Menu keys
G422
HN244
TESTIN
TPIN
TP
FG
LAN
EMG
G300/G301
MC
MC
MC
FG
DCIN
FCU7-DU1xx-xx
Display unit
Keyboard Unit
G402
2ch
Drive units
8.4-type:G487
10.4-type:G482/G484
8.4-type:G097/G497
10.4-type:G098/G492
(Note1)
F480/G488
Backlight
inverter
Select
FCUA-R030
F070
F120
Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared
by the machine tool builder.
The name with brackets indicates the
cable for the unit.
FCUA-
R300
/R301
Machine
control relay/
contact
Machine
control relay/
contact
Machine
control relay/
contact
Remote I/O unit
ENC
Synchronous feed
encoder
Skip signal input
Max. 8 points
Circuit protector (CP)
RS232C device
24VDC stabilized
power supply
AC reactor
D-AL
Contactor
CNC control unit
15-type Display unit
8.4-type, 10.4-type Display unit
FCU7-MU531/541
FCU7-MA541
Expansion unit
(option)
FCU7-HN7xx
Front
memory
I/F card
No-fuse breaker (NFB)
L1 L2 L3
ON OFF
MC
CP/NFB
DCOUT
ACIN
24VDC
1ch: F034
2ch: F035
CP/NFB
G395/G396/G380
G395/G396/G380
2ch
5V: G023/G024
FCUA-R050/054
G214
Ethernet device
SIO1
(XGA:1024 x 768)
OPT1 OPT2
FCU7-MU531/541
FCU7-MA541
FRONT
SIO2
FCU7-HN7xx
EMG
LAN
DCIN
RIO1SKIP ENC CG71CG72
FCU7-DU180-11
LCD
HN278
INV
MENUKEY
G498
G489G488
PWR
LCD
TP
G423
3.3VIN
G450
MENUKEY
BL
DSPLV
MENUKEY700
G092
CF card I/F
CNC control unit
Expansion unit
(option)
Front
memory
I/F card
USB memory
I/F
Display unit
Menu keys
(Note 1) Touch panels only

11 1211 12
CNC system General Connection Diagram
M700VW Series
CF
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
FCUA-R211
/ SH41
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
SV1
LAN1
OPT1
EXT-CON
SV2
SIO×2
RIO1
Slot1
OPI
LAN（user）
EMG
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
FCUA-R211
/ SH41
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
MC
R S T
ON OFF
MC
DCOUT
ON/OFF
ACIN
CP
PD27
DCOUT
FG
ACIN
DCIN
CF01
HDD
INV
LVDS
MC
F110
RA
FG
FG
EMG
F070
G171
DCIN
CF24
EMG
MENUKEY
MPG
RIO3
F020/F021/F022
Mouse
USB1USB2 FRONT_OUT
PC Keyboard
ON
G170
ON/OFF
F120
HDD
CF25
USB
HN27x
RIO2
LAN
PCLAN
DX101
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
Remote I/O unit
Machine I/O
F070
DCIN
FCUA-R050/R054
MPG/
ENC
SIO
G018
FCU7-KB0xx
G290
G310
G294
G301
SKIP
G023/G024
（Max:20m）（5V）
F034/F035
SH21
SH21
F120
（5V/12V）
F070
G990
＜F142＞
RA
FG
EMG
G485
FCU7-MU031/041
FCU7-MA041
FCU7-EX891
(*1)
MI-CM15-M5A/B : with LVDS I/F SET
MI-CM15-M5C : without LVDS I/F SET
G395/G396/G380
OPT 2
FCUA-R211/SH41
FCUA-R211/SH41
FCU7-
DX670/671/770/771
CG3x
G031/G032
G020/G021/G022
NCRST
SDIO
FCUA-DX1xx FCUA-DX1xx
FCUA-DX1xx FCUA-DX1xx
G395/G396/G380
FCUA-R211/SH41
CP
HN012
SIO
CF
FCU7-HD002-001
TPOUT
OFF
OPI
（NFB）
MR-J2-CT
MR-J2-CT
FCUA-R030
FG
G430
DCIN
CF01
HDD
INV
LVDS
CF24
MENUKEY
USB1USB2 FRONT_OUT
ON/OFF
CF25
USB
LAN
G294
HN012
SIO
CF
TPOUT
LVDS I/F
SET
G483
G092
HN245
G420
Backlight inverter PCMCIA slot
Machine I/O Machine I/O
RS232C
Remote I/O unit
Machine I/O Machine I/O
10.4-type LCD
15-type LCD
24VDC stabilized
power supply
Backlight inverter
OT release SW
RS232C
device
Dotted lines indicate the sections
prepared by the machine tool builder.
PCMCIA slot
Keyboard unit
Can be added onto
back of keyboard
CNC control unit
Expansion Unit
Drive units
Operation panel
I/O unit
Synchronous feed encoder
Manual pulse
generator
Drive units
Auxiliary axis/Servo drive units
Auxiliary axis/Servo drive units
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O unit
No-fuse breaker
The name with brackets
indicates the cable for the unit.
or terminator
Menu key
Menu key
PC Board
MI-CM15-M5x(*1)
PC Board
MI-CM15-M5x(*1)
HN275 : with touch panel function
HN274 : without touch panel function
Hard disk unit
Can be added onto
back of keyboard
or terminator
device
or terminator
Manual pulse
generator
OT release SW
HN245：with touch panel function
15-type Display unit FCU7-DA636-11/33
10.4-type Display unit FCU7-DA646-11/33
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC 24VDC
24VDC 24VDC
Skip signal input
Handy terminal
Connection of MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel
Machine operation panel Cable Connection destination E70/M70V M700VS M700VW
Machine operation panel A (RIOIN) FCUA-R211 or SH41 Control unit (RIO1) s s s
Machine operation panel A (RIOIN) FCUA-R211 or SH41 Control unit (RIO2) − − s
Machine operation panel A (RIOIN) G214 Control unit (CG72) − s −
Machine operation panel A (RIOIN) FCUA-R211 or SH41 Operation panel I/O unit (RIO3) s s s
Machine operation panel B G460 Machine operation panel A (SUBP) s s s
Machine operation panel B F120 Control unit (EMG) s s −
[Example] When connecting to the operation panel I/O unit (RIO3)
(With E70/M70V/M700VS)
F120
EMG
FCUA-R211/SH41
G054
F070
(FCU7-KB926)
(FCU7-KB921)
24VDC 24VDC
F070
EXT
G460
RIO3
CG71
CG71
DCIN
G011
DCIN
KEYSW
DCOUT
RIOIN
SUBPFG
EXT
Only when relaying the power G071
When directly supplying the power
HN232 Card
(Placed on the back of the panel A)
Machine operation panel A
Control Unit
Operation panel
I/O Unit
Machine operation panel B
(With M700VW)
G460
G054
EXT
FCUA-R211/SH41
(FCU7-KB921)
(FCU7-KB926)
KEYSW
SUBP
RIOIN
DCOUT
DCIN
FG
24VDC
F070
24VDC
24VDC
F070
DCIN
RIO3 OPI
G018
OPI
F070
DCIN
When directly supplying the powerOnly when relaying
the power G071
Control unit
Machine operation panel A
Machine operation panel B
Operation panel I/O unit
EMG signal transfer, etc.
HN232 Card
(Placed on the back of the panel A)

13 1413 14
CNCsystemCablesList
CNCsystemCablesList
Cables for CNC
Application Type
Length
(m)
Contents
Supported model
E70/M70V M700VS M700VW
(1) 24VDC power cable for PD25/PD27
F110 L0.5M 0.5
Y
DCOUT
DCIN
CF01
  
F110 L1.5M 1.5
F110 L3M 3
F110 L5M 5
F110 L8M 8
F110 L10M 10
F110 L15M 15
(2) ON/OFF switch cable for PD25/PD27
F170 L0.5M 0.5
X
ON/OFF
  
F170 L1.5M 1.5
F170 L3M 3
F170 L5M 5
F170 L8M 8
F170 L10M 10
F170 L15M 15
(3)
Power ON/OFF cable
Display unit - PD25/PD27 power unit
G171 L0.5M 0.5
CF24 ON/OFF
X
32415
– – 
G171 L1M 1
G171 L3M 3
G171 L5M 5
G171 L7M 7
G171 L10M 10
G171 L15M 15
(4)
ON/OFF switch cable
ON/OFF switch - display unit
G170 L0.35M 0.35
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
LGOFF
LGON
– – 
G170 L0.5M 0.5
G170 L1M 1
G170 L1.5M 1.5
G170 L2M 2
G170 L3M 3
G170 L5M 5
G170 L10M 10
G170 L15M 15
(5) 24VDC power cable
F070 L0.5M 0.5 Y
DCIN
  
F070 L1.5M 1.5
F070 L3M 3
F070 L5M 5
F070 L8M 8
F070 L10M 10
F070 L15M 15
F070 L20M 20
(6) Emergency stop cable
F120 L0.5M 0.5
EMG
  
F120 L1.5M 1.5
F120 L3M 3
F120 L5M 5
F120 L8M 8
F120 L10M 10
F120 L15M 15
F120 L20M 20
(7)
Manual pulse generator cable (12V) : 1ch
(for connection to operation panel I/O unit)
F320 L1M 1
HANDLE
  –
F320 L2M 2
F320 L3M 3
F320 L5M 5
F320 L8M 8
F320 L10M 10
F320 L15M 15
F320 L20M 20
(8)
Manual pulse generator cable(12V) : 2ch
F321 L1M 1
HANDLE
  –
F321 L2M 2
F321 L3M 3
F321 L5M 5
F321 L8M 8
F321 L10M 10
F321 L15M 15
F321 L20M 20
(9)
F020 L0.5M 0.5
MPG
– – 
F020 L1M 1
F020 L2M 2
F020 L3M 3
F020 L5M 5
F020 L7M 7
F020 L10M 10
F020 L20M 20
(10)
F021 L1M 1
MPG
– – 
F021 L2M 2
(11)
F022 L1M 1
MPG
– – 
F022 L2M 2
(12)
F023 L1M 1
HANDLE
  –
F023 L2M 2
F023 L3M 3
F023 L5M 5
F023 L8M 8
F023 L10M 10
F023 L15M 15
F023 L20M 20
CNC system Cables List
Application Type
Length
(m)
Contents
Supported model
(13)
F024 L1M 1
HANDLE
  –
F024 L2M 2
F024 L3M 3
F024 L5M 5
F024 L8M 8
F024 L10M 10
F024 L15M 15
F024 L20M 20
(14)
G020 L2M 2
MPG
– – 
(15)
G021 L2M 2
MPG
– – 
(16)
G022 L2M 2
MPG
– – 
(17)
(for connection to control unit)
G023 L1M 1
ENC
  
G023 L2M 2
G023 L3M 3
G023 L5M 5
G023 L8M 8
G023 L10M 10
G023 L15M 15
G023 L20M 20
(18)
(for connection to control unit)
G024 L1M 1
ENC
  
G024 L2M 2
G024 L3M 3
G024 L5M 5
G024 L8M 8
G024 L10M 10
G024 L15M 15
G024 L20M 20
(19)
RS232C I/F cable : 1ch
(for control unit)
F034 L0.5M 0.5
SIO
1ch
  
F034 L1M 1
F034 L2M 2
F034 L3M 3
F034 L5M 5
F034 L8M 8
F034 L10M 10
(20)
(for control unit)
F035 L0.5M 0.5
1chSIO
2ch
  
F035 L1M 1
F035 L2M 2
F035 L3M 3
F035 L5M 5
F035 L8M 8
F035 L10M 10
(21)
(for display unit)
G031 L0.5M 0.5
: 1ch
SIOPC
– – 
G031 L1M 1
G031 L2M 2
G031 L3M 3
G031 L5M 5
G031 L7M 7
G031 L10M 10
G031 L15M 15
(22)
(for display unit)
G032 L0.5M 0.5
: 1chSIOPC
: 2ch
– – 
G032 L1M 1
G032 L2M 2
G032 L3M 3
G032 L5M 5
G032 L7M 7
G032 L10M 10
G032 L15M 15
(23) Analog output cable
F221 L1M 1
AO
  –
F221 L2M 2
F221 L3M 3
F221 L5M 5
F221 L8M 8
F221 L10M 10
F221 L15M 15
F221 L20M 20
(24)
Remote I/O (with terminal block)
between remote I/O,
remote I/O-CNC control unit,
remote I/O-Operation panel I/O unit,
remote I/O-MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A
FCUA-R211-0.3M 0.3
RIO1, RIO2, RIO3(FCUA-R211) (FCUA-R211)
123
X
  
FCUA-R211-1M 1
FCUA-R211-2M 2
FCUA-R211-3M 3
FCUA-R211-5M 5
FCUA-R211-8M 8
FCUA-R211-10M 10
FCUA-R211-15M 15
FCUA-R211-20M 20
(25)
Remote I/O cable
between remote I/O,
remote I/O-CNC control unit,
remote I/O-Operation panel I/O unit,
remote I/O-MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A
(between remote I/O units in a panel)
SH41 0.3M 0.3
RIO1, RIO3(CSH41) (CSH41)
123
X
  SH41 0.5M 0.5
SH41 0.7M 0.7

15 1615 16
CNCsystemCablesList
CNCsystemCablesList
Application Type
Length
(m)
Contents
Supported model
(26)
DI/DO cable (one side connector)
(for remote I/O unit)
FCUA-R300 3
DI-L/DO-L, DI-R/DO-R
  
(27)
DI/DO cable (both side connectors)
FCUA-R301-1M 1 DI-L/DO-L, DI-R/DO-R
  
FCUA-R301-2M 2
FCUA-R301-3M 3
FCUA-R301-5M 5
(28)
DI/DO cable (one side connector)
(for operation panel I/O unit)
F351 3
CG31, CG32, CG33, CG34, CG35, CG36
  –
(29) Cable between control unit - operation panel I/O unit
G018 L1M 1
– – 
G018 L2M 2
G018 L3M 3
G018 L5M 5
G018 L7M 7
G018 L10M 10
G018 L15M 15
G018 L20M 20
(30) Operation panel I/O interface cable G011 L0.5M 0.5 G011
  –
(31)
Operation panel I/O interface cable
(Only for M700VS Series 15-type Display unit)
G012 L1M 1 G012
–  –
(32)
LAN cross cable
(Shielded cable is recommended when the length will be
1m or more)
G300 L1M 1
G300
LAN LAN
1
8   
G300 L3M 3
G300 L5M 5
G300 L10M 10
(33)
LAN straight cable
(Shielded cable is recommended when the length will be
1m or more)
G301 L1M 1 G301
LAN LAN
1
8   
(34) SKIP input cable
FCUA-R030-3M 3 SKIP
  
FCUA-R030-7M 7
(35)
Analog input/output cable
FCUA-R031-2M 2 AIO
– – FCUA-R031-3M 3
FCUA-R031-7M 7
(36)
Synchronous encoder - control unit
(straight, with connector)
FCUA-R050-5M 5
ENC
  
(37)
Synchronous encoder - control unit
(right angle, with connector)
FCUA-R054-3M 3
ENC
  
FCUA-R054-5M 5
FCUA-R054-10M 10
FCUA-R054-15M 15
FCUA-R054-20M 20
(38)
Remote I/O cable
NC for RIO2 - remote I/O unit
G214 L1M 1 CG72
G214　**.*M
CG72
FG
ANP３D-
１２３
G214　**.*M
I/O address: X100 to, Y100 to
–  –
G214 L5M 5
G214 L10M 10
G214 L20M 20
(39) Cable for connection to handy terminal
G430-L3M 3
ENC
HOST
SIO
Control panel
terminal block
– – G430-L5M 5
G430-L10M 10
(40) Terminator for emergency stop interface G123 –
EMG
G123
– – 
(41) Terminator for remote I/O interface R-TM –
One terminator is required to be installed at
the final end of remote IO unit.
  
(42) Terminator for OPI interface E-TM –
If no operation panel I/O unit is provided,
terminator for OPI interface is required to be
installed in the CNC unit.
– – 
(43)
Cable for hard disk
(comes with the hard disk)
F142 0.5 – – 
(44)
USB cable for keyboard
(comes with the keyboard unit)
G290 0.7
USB USB1
– – 
(45)
Cable for NC reset
(comes with the operation I/O unit)
G310 0.1 G310
NCRST NCRST
– – 
Cable connector sets for CNC
Application Type Contents
Supported model
(1) Control unit - General I/O units FCUA-CS000
Connector (3M)
10120-3000VE × 2pcs.
Connector case (3M)
10320-52F0-008 × 2pcs.
  
(2) Remote I/O unit - terminal block FCUA-CS301
Connector (3M)
7940-6500SC x 4pcs.
Strain relief (3M)
3448-7940 x 2pcs.
  
(3)
200VAC power supply connector (for power supply unit PD25)
200V/400VAC power supply connector (for power supply unit PD27)
FCUA-CN200
Connector
(Tyco Electronics)
2-178288-3 × 1pc.
Tin contact
(Tyco Electronics)
1-175218-5 × 3pcs.
  
(4)
24VDC power supply connector
for power supply unit (PD25/PD27)
(with power OFF detection)
3-178127-6
1-175218-5* × 6pcs.
Connector
(Tyco Electronics)
3-178127-6 × 1pc.
Tin contact
(Tyco Electronics)
1-175218-5 × 6pcs.
  
(5) ON/OFF connector for power supply unit (PD25/PD27)
1-178288-5
1-175218-5* × 6pcs.
Connector
(Tyco Electronics)
1-178288-5 × 1pc.
Tin contact
(Tyco Electronics)
1-175218-5 × 6pcs.
  
(6) Emergency stop connector
005057-9403
0016020103* × 3pcs.
Connector
(MOLEX)
005057-9403 × 1pc.
Gold contact
(MOLEX)
0016020103 × 3pcs.
  
(7) Remote I/O communication connector FCUA-CN211
Connector
(Tyco Electronics)
1-178288-3 × 1pc.
Gold contact
(Tyco Electronics)
1-175218-2 × 3pcs.
  
(8) 24VDC power supply connector FCUA-CN220
Connector
(Tyco Electronics)
2-178288-3 × 1pc.
Tin contact
(Tyco Electronics)
1-175218-5 × 3pcs.
  
(9) DIO connector FCUA-CN300
Connector (3M)
7940-6500SC x 2pcs.
−   
(10) Manual pulse generator input connector
CDA-15P
HDA-CTH
CD-PC-111* × 14pcs.
Connector
(Hirose Electric)
CDA-15P × 1pc.
Gold contact
(Hirose Electric)
CD-PC-111 × 14pc.
– – 
Housing
(Hirose Electric)
HDA-CTH × 1pc.
−
CNC system Cables List

17 1817 18
CNCsystemE70/M70V/M700VSeriesSpecificationsList
CNC system E70/M70V/M700V Series Specifications List
: Standard : Option : Selection S/W ver.K1
Class
Machining center system Lathe system Lathe system
General explanationE70
Series
M70V Series M700VS Series M700VW Series E70
Series
TypeB TypeA M720VS M730VS M750VS M720VW M730VW M750VW TypeB TypeA M720VS M730VS M750VS M720VW M730VW M750VW
1 Control axes
1 Control axes
1 Number of basic control axes (NC axes)  3  3  3  3  3  3  3  3  3  2  2  2  2  2  2  2  2  2
The NC axis, spindle, and PLC axis are generically called the control axis.
The NC axis can be manually or automatically operated using a machining program.
The PLC axis can be controlled using a sequence program.
The number of axes that is within the max. number of control axes, and that does not exceed the max. number given for the
NC axis, spindle and PLC axis, can be used.
2 Max. number of axes (NC axes + Spindles + PLC axes) 6 9 11 12 16 16 12 16 16 6 9 11 12 16 16 12 16 16
1 Max. number of NC axes (in total for all the part systems) 3 5 8 8 16 16 8 16 16 3 5 9 12 16 16 12 16 16
2 Max. number of spindles 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 3 4 4 6 6 4 6 6
3 Max. number of PLC axes 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
3 Max. number of auxiliary axes – – – – – – 4 6 6 – – – – – – 4 6 6 Auxiliary axis: This can be connected to the channel (SV2) for J2-CT.
4 Max. number of PLC indexing axes 1 4 4 4 6 6 4 6 6 1 4 4 4 6 6 4 6 6 The number of PLC axes available to be used as indexing axis.
5 Number of simultaneous contouring control axes 3 4 4 4 4 8 4 4 8 3 4 4 4 4 8 4 4 8 Number of axes with which simultaneous interpolation control is possible.
6 Max. number of NC axes in a part system 3 5 8 6 8 8 6 8 8 3 5 8 6 8 8 6 8 8 Max. number of NC axes possible to control in the same part system.
2 Control part system
1 Standard number of part systems 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 One part system is the standard.
2 Max. number of part systems  1  1  2  2  2  2  2  2  2  1  1  2  2  4  4  2  4  4 Up to four part systems for a lathe system, and up to two part systems for a machining center system.
3 Control axes and operation modes
1 Tape (RS-232C input) mode                   In this mode, operation is performed using the machining program data from the RS-232C interface built in the CNC unit.
2 Memory mode                   Machining programs stored in the memory of the CNC module are run.
3 MDI mode                   MDI data stored in the memory of the CNC unit are executed.
4 High-speed program server mode
1 CF card in control unit – – – – – –    – – – – – –    Machining programs stored in a compact flash (CF) card can be operated by installing the CF card in the control unit.
5 IC card mode (Front IC card mode)                  
Machining programs stored in a PCMCIA/CF card can be operated by installing the PCMCIA/CF card on the front of the
control unit.
6 Hard disk mode – – – – – –    – – – – – –    Machining programs stored in the hard disk can be operated.
2 Input command
1 Data increment
1 Least command increment
The data increment handled in the controller includes the input setting increment and command increment. Each type is set
with parameters.
1 Least command increment 1µm                   Possible to command in increments of 0.001mm (linear axis) and 0.001° (rotary axis).
2 Least command increment 0.1µm                   Possible to command in increments of 0.0001mm (linear axis) and 0.0001° (rotary axis).
3 Least command increment 0.01µm (10nm) – – – –   –   – – – –   –   Possible to command in increments of 0.00001mm (linear axis) and 0.00001° (rotary axis).
4 Least command increment 0.001µm (1nm) – – – –   –   – – – –   –   Possible to command in increments of 0.000001mm (linear axis) and 0.000001° (rotary axis).
2 Least control increment The least control increment determines the CNC's internal operation accuracy.
1 Least control increment 0.01μm (10nm)                   Possible to control in increments of 0.00001mm (linear axis) and 0.00001° (rotary axis).
2 Least control increment 0.001μm (1nm)                   Possible to control in increments of 0.000001mm (linear axis) and 0.000001° (rotary axis).
3 Indexing increment – – –       – – –       This function limits the command value for the rotary axis.
2 Unit system
1 Inch/Metric changeover                  
The unit systems of the data handled in the controller include the metric system and inch system. The type can be designated
with a parameter and a machining program.
2 Input command increment tenfold          – – – – – – – – –
The program's command increment can be multiplied by an arbitrary scale with the parameter designation. This function is
valid when a decimal point is not used for the command increment.
3 Program format
1 Program format G code (program) format
1 Format 1 for Lathe – – – – – – – – –          G code list for the lathe system
The G-code list is selected by parameter.2 Format 2 for Lathe – – – – – – – – – –        
3 Special format for lathe – – – – – – – – –          (Prepared for a specific machine tool builder)
4 Format 1 for Machining center          – – – – – – – – – G code list for the machining center system
The G-code list is selected by parameter.5 Format 2 for Machining center (M2 format) –         – – – – – – – – –
6 MITSUBISHI CNC special format – – – – – – – – – –        
The formats of the fixed cycle for turning machining (G77 to G79), compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (G71 to
G76) and fixed cycle for drilling (G80 to G89) can be switched to the MITSUBISHI CNC special formats.
4 Command value
1 Decimal point input 1, 2                  
For the decimal point input type 1, the unit of the last digit of a command without a decimal point is the same as that of the
least command increment. For decimal point input type 2, the last digit of a command without a decimal point is interpreted
in millimeters during the metric mode, in inches in the inch mode, or in seconds for a time-based command.
2 Absolute/Incremental command                  
When axis coordinate data are issued in a machining program command, either the incremental command method, which
commands a relative distance from the current position, or the absolute command method, which commands a movement to
a designated position in a predetermined coordinate system, can be selected.
3 Diameter/Radius designation – – – – – – – – –         
The designation method of an axis command value can be changed over with parameters between the radius designation
or diameter designation. When the diameter designation is selected, the scale of the length of the selected axis is doubled.
(moves only half (1/2) the commanded amount)
3 Positioning/Interpolation
1 Positioning
1 Positioning                   This function carries out positioning at high speed using a rapid traverse rate with the travel command value given in the program.
2 Unidirectional positioning          – – – – – – – – – The G code command always moves the tool to the final position in the direction determined by parameters.
2 Linear/Circular interpolation
1 Linear interpolation                  
Linear interpolation is a function that moves a tool linearly by the travel command value supplied in the program at the cutting
feedrate designated by the F code.
2 Circular interpolation (Center/Radius designation)                   This function moves a tool along a circular arc on the plane selected by the travel command value supplied in the program.
3 Helical interpolation                  
With this function, any two of three axes intersecting orthogonally are made to perform circular interpolation while the third
axis performs linear interpolation in synchronization with the arc rotation. This control can be exercised to machine large-
diameter screws or 3-dimensional cams.
4 Spiral/Conical interpolation – –        – – – – – – – – – This function interpolates arcs where the start point and end point are not on the circumference of the same circle into spiral shapes.
5 Cylindrical interpolation –         –        
This function transfers the shape that is on the cylinder's side surface (shape yielded by the cylindrical coordinate system)
onto a plane, and when the transferred shape is designated in the program in the form of plane coordinates, the shape
is converted into a movement along the linear and rotary axes of the original cylinder coordinates, and the contours are
controlled by means of the CNC unit during machining.
6 Polar coordinate interpolation – – –       –        
This function converts the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate axes into linear axis movements (tool
movements) and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to control the contours. It is useful for cutting linear cutouts on
the outside diameter of the workpiece, grinding cam shafts, etc.
7 Milling interpolation – – – – – – – – – – –       
When a lathe with linear axes (X, Z axes) and rotary axis (C axis) serving as the control axes is to perform milling at a workpiece
end face or in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece, this function uses the hypothetical axis Y, which is at right angles to both
the X and Z axes, to enable the milling shape to be programmed as the X, Y and Z orthogonal coordinate system commands.
8 Hypothetical axis interpolation – – –       – – – – – – – – –
This function sets one of the axes of the helical interpolation or spiral interpolation, including a linear axis, as a hypothetical
axis (axis with no actual movement), and performs pulse distribution. This enables SIN or COS interpolation, which
corresponds to the side view (view from the hypothetical axis) of the helical interpolation or spiral interpolation.

19 2019 20
Class
Series
Series
3 Curve interpolation
2 Exponential interpolation – – –       – – –       With this function, the rotary axis movement is changed into exponential functions vis-a-vis the linear axis movements.
3 Spline interpolation (1st part system only) – –        – – – – – – – – –
This function automatically generates spline curves that smoothly pass through rows of dots designated by a fine-segment machining
program, and performs interpolation for the paths along the curves. This enables high-speed and high-accuracy machining.
4 NURBS interpolation – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
This function realizes NURBS curve machining by commanding NURBS curve parameters (number of stages, weight, knot,
control point). The path does not need to be replaced with fine segments.
5 3-dimensional circular interpolation – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
An arc shape determined by three points (start point, intermediate point, end point) designated in the three-dimensional
space can be machined.
4 Feed
1 Feed rate
1 Rapid traverse rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis using parameters.
2 Cutting feed rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
This function specifies the feedrate of the cutting commands, and gives a command for a feed amount per spindle rotation or
feed amount per minute.
3 Manual feed rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
The manual feedrates are designated as the feedrate in jog mode or incremental feed mode for manual operation and the
feedrate during dry run ON for automatic operation. The manual feedrates are set using external signals.
4 Rotary axis command speed tenfold                   This function multiplies the rotary axis' command speed by ten during initial inching.
2 Feed rate input methods
1 Feed per minute                  
By issuing a G command, the command from the block is issued directly with a numerical value following F as the feedrate
per minute (mm/min or inch/min).
2 Feed per revolution                  
By issuing a G command, the command from the block is issued directly with a numerical value following F as the feedrate
per spindle revolution (mm/rev or inch/rev).
3 Inverse time feed – –        – – – – – – – – –
This function can issue one block of machining time (inverse) commands in F commands, in place of normal feed commands.
This enables the machining speed on the cutting surface to be constantly controlled and prevents the loss of accuracy, even
if radius compensation is applied to the machining program that expresses the free curve surface with fine segment lines.
4 F 1-digit feed                   The feedrate registered by parameter in advance can be assigned by designating a single digit, following address F.
5 Manual speed command                  
By enabling a manual speed command and selecting either handle feed or jog (manual) feed in the memory or MDI mode,
automatic operation can be carried out at this feedrate.
3 Override
1 Rapid traverse override                   Override can be applied to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the external input signal.
2 Cutting feed override                   Override can be applied to the feedrate command designated in the machining program using the external input signal.
3 2nd cutting feed override                   Override can be further applied as a second-stage override to the feedrate after the cutting feed override has been applied.
4 Override cancel                  
By turning on the override cancel external signal, the override is automatically set to 100% for the cutting feed during the
automatic operation mode (tape, memory and MDI).
4 Acceleration/Deceleration
1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation                  
Acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied to all commands. The acceleration/deceleration patterns can be selected
using a parameter from the following types: linear acceleration/deceleration, soft acceleration/deceleration, exponent function
acceleration/deceleration and exponent function acceleration/linear deceleration.
2
Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/
deceleration
                 
This function performs acceleration/deceleration at a constant inclination during linear acceleration/deceleration in the rapid
traverse mode. Compared to the method of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the constant inclination acceleration/
deceleration method enables improved cycle time.
3
Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step
acceleration/deceleration (1st part system only)
–         – – – – – – – – –
This function carries out the acceleration/deceleration according to the torque characteristic of the motor in the rapid traverse mode during
automatic operation. (This function is not available in manual operation.) The rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/
deceleration method makes for improved cycle time because the positioning time is shortened by using the motor ability to the maximum.
5 Thread cutting
1 Thread cutting (Lead/Thread number designation)                   Thread cutting with a designated lead can be performed. Inch threads are cut by designating the number of threads per inch with the E address.
2 Variable lead thread cutting – – – – – – – – –          By commanding the lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation, variable lead thread cutting can be performed.
3 Synchronous tapping
1 Synchronous tapping cycle                  
This function performs tapping through synchronized control of the spindle and servo axis. This eliminates the need for
floating taps and enables tapping to be conducted at a highly accurate tapping depth.
2 Pecking tapping cycle –         –        
The load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting the workpiece to the hole
bottom with a multiple number of passes.
3 Deep-hole tapping cycle –         –        
In the deep-hole tapping, the load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting the
workpiece to the hole bottom with a multiple number of passes.
4 Chamfering – – – – – – – – –          Chamfering can be enabled during the thread cutting cycle by using external signals.
6 Circular thread cutting – – – – – – – – – – – –       Circular thread in which the lead is in longitudinal direction can be cut.
8 High-speed synchronous tapping (OMR-DD) –         –        
The servo axis directly detects and compensates the spindle's delay in tracking by using the communication between drive units over
the high-speed optical servo network. By minimizing the synchronization error, the accuracy of the synchronous tapping is increased.
6 Manual feed
1 Manual rapid traverse                  
The tool can be moved at the rapid traverse rate for each axis separately. Override can also be applied to the rapid traverse
rate by means of the rapid traverse override function.
2 Jog feed                   The tool can be moved in the axis direction (+ or –) in which the machine is to be moved at the per-minute feedrate.
3 Incremental feed                   The tool can be moved for the designated amount (incremental value) in the axis direction each time the jog switch is pressed.
4 Handle feed                   The machine can be moved in very small amounts by rotating the manual pulse generator.
5 Manual feed rate B                   Manual feedrate B is a function that sets an arbitrary axis feedrate from the user PLC separately from the manual feedrate.
6 Manual feed rate B surface speed control – – –       – – – – – – – – –
When machining with the manual feedrate B function by moving the orthogonal axis while rotating the rotary table, the table
rotation speed is controlled according to the distance from the rotation center.
7 Dwell
1 Dwell (Time-based designation)                  
The G code command temporarily stops machine movements and sets the machine in the stand-by status for the time
designated in the program.
5 Program memory/editing
1 Memory capacity
1 Memory capacity (number of programs stored)
1 15kB[40m] (64 programs) – – –       – – –      
Machining programs are stored in the NC memory, data server or external memory devices (front IC card, memory card, hard
disk, etc.).
(Note) For a multi-part system, the specifications shown here is the total for all part systems.
* M70V TypeA requires a memory expansion unit FCU7-HN754.
2 30kB[80m] (128 programs) – – –       – – –      
3 60kB[160m] (200 programs) – – –       – – –      
4 125kB[320m] (200 programs) – – –       – – –      
5 230kB[600m] (400 programs)  – –        – –      
6 500kB[1280m] (1000 programs) –         –        
7 1000kB[2560m] (1000 programs) – – –       – – –      
8 2000kB[5120m] (1000 programs) – –
*
(HN754)
      – –
*
(HN754)
     
2 Editing
1 Program editing                   This function enables program editing such as correction, deletion and addition.
2 Background editing                   This function enables one machining program to be created or edited while another program is running.

21 2221 22
Class
Series
Series
3 Buffer correction                  
During automatic operation (including memory, tape, Hard disk (HD), IC card, Memory card or Data Server (DS) operation) or
MDI operation, this function initiates single block stop and enables the next command to be corrected or changed.
6 Operation and display
1 Structure of operation/display panel
1 Color display (8.4-type LCD TFT)       – – –       – – –
The setting and display unit consists of the setting part and the keyboard part.
Refer to “Displays Keyboards” described previously for the details.
2 Color display (10.4-type LCD TFT) –      – – – –      – – –
3 Color display (15-type LCD TFT) – – –    – – – – – –    – – –
4 Color display (10.4-type LCD TFT/WindowsXPe) – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
5 Color display (15-type LCD TFT/WindowsXPe) – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
6
Color touch-panel display (10.4-type LCD TFT/
WindowsXPe)
– – – – – –    – – – – – –   
7 Color touch-panel display (10.4-type LCD TFT) –      – – – –      – – –
8
Color touch-panel display (15-type LCD TFT/
WindowsXPe)
– – – – – –    – – – – – –   
2 Operation methods and functions
1 Operation input                  
In addition to the method of directly inputting numeric data, a method to input the operation results using four basic arithmetic
operators and function symbols can be used for specific data settings.
2 Absolute value/Incremental value setting                   When setting the data, the absolute/incremental setting can be selected from the menu.
5 Displayed part system switch – –        – –        The part system displayed on the screen can be changed.
6 Menu list                  
The menu list function displays the menu configuration of each screen as a list, making it possible to directly select the menu
for other screens.
7 Display switch by operation mode                   The screen display changes when the screen mode selection switch is changed.
8 External signal display switch – –        – –        The screen display changes with the signal from PLC.
10 Screen saver, backlight OFF                   The screen saver function protects the display unit by turning the backlight OFF after the length of time specified in a parameter.
11 Parameter/Operation guidance *         *        
This function displays the details of the parameters or the operation methods according to the state of the screen currently
displayed.
* E70 requires add-on guidance data.
12 Alarm guidance *         *        
Guidance is displayed for the alarm currently issued.
13 Machining program input mistake check warning – – –       – – –      
If an illegal input is found in the decimal point after the current cursor position, the cursor will move to that position, and a
warning message will appear.
15 Screen Capture       – – –       – – – This function allows to output a bitmap file of a screen displayed on the setting and display unit.
16 User selectable menu configuration                  
This function allows to change the display order of the main menu in the “Monitor”, “Setup” and “Edit” screens, and to change
display/non-display selection.
17 PC-NC network automatic connection – – – – – –    – – – – – –    This function supports to restore the connection when the network connection fails between the display unit and the control unit.
18 Device open parameter –         –         This function can set or change the user backed up area of the PLC device from the NC screen.
19 SRAM open parameter –         –         This function can set or change the SRAM open area for machine tool builders from the NC screen.
20 MTB selectable menu configuration                  
Menu items on the “Monitor”, “Setup” and “Edit” screens (of MITSUBISHI standard format) can be moved within a screen or
hidden as desired. The custom screen menu items added by machine tool builders, on the contrary, cannot be moved or hidden.
3 Display methods and contents
1 Status display                   The status of the program currently being executed is indicated.
2 Clock display                   The clock is built in, and the date (year, month, date) and time (hour, minute, second) are displayed.
3 Monitor screen display                   Various information related to operation, such as the axis counter, speed display and MSTB command are displayed.
4 Setup screen display                  
Tool/workpiece related settings, user parameter settings, MDI editing, counter setting, manual numeric command issuing and
pallet program registration (option) can be carried out.
5 Edit screen display                  
Machining program editing (addition, deletion, change) and checking, simple program creation, and machining program input/
output can be carried out.
6 Diagnosis screen display                  
The following operations related to the CNC diagnosis can be carried out.
(1) Display the hardware and software configuration.
(2) Display the CNC options.
(3) Diagnose the PLC interface.
(4) Display the drive unit information.
(5) Display the alarm message / alarm history list etc.
7 Maintenance screen display                   Parameter setting and display, and NC data input/output, etc., can be carried out.
8 Additional languages
1 Japanese                  
Available display languages.
(Note) In E70/M70V/M700VS Series, the guidance can be displayed in English and another two languages selected from the
available languages.
2 English                  
3 German    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
4 Italian    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
5 French    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
6 Spanish    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
7 Chinese
1 Traditional Chinese characters    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
2 Simplified Chinese characters    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
8 Korean    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
9 Portuguese    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
10 Hungarian    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
11 Dutch    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
12 Swedish    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
13 Turkish    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
14 Polish    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
15 Russian    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
16 Czech    / / / / / /    / / / / / /
7 Input/Output functions and devices
1 Input/Output data
1 Machining program input/output                  
Certain kinds of data handled by the NC system can be input and output between the NC system's memory and external
devices.
2 Tool offset data input/output                  
3 Common variable input/output                  
4 Parameter input/output                  
5 History data output                  
7 System configuration data output                  
2 Input/Output I/F
1 RS-232C I/F                   Port 1 and 2 are available with the RS-232C interface. The connection point for a connector depends on the product model.

23 2423 24
Class
Series
Series
2 IC card I/F
1 I/F for IC card in control unit [up to 2GByte] – – – – – –    – – – – – –    Interface card to use CF card can be attached inside the NC control unit.
2 Front IC card I/F [up to 2GByte]                   Interface card to use PCMCIA card can be attached in front of the NC control unit.
3 Ethernet I/F                   Ethernet interface card can be attached onto the NC unit.
4 Hard disk I/F – – – – – –    – – – – – –    A hard disk drive can be mounted.
6 USB memory I/F [up to 2GByte]                   A USB memory can be mounted.
3 Computer link
1 Computer link B –         –         Computer link B is a function to receive/send data between the host computer and the CNC.
4 Others
1 Handy terminal connection – – – – – –    – – – – – –    Machine operations, such as setup operations, are possible at hand by using a handy terminal.
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous functions
1 Spindle functions (S)
1 Spindle control functions
The spindle rotation speed is determined in consideration of the override and gear ratio for the S command given in
automatic operation or with manual numerical commands, and the spindle is rotated.
1 Spindle digital I/F                   This interface is used to connect the digital spindle (AC spindle motor and spindle drive unit).
2 Spindle analog I/F                   Spindle control can be executed using an analog spindle instead of the digital spindle.
3 Coil switch                  
Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrums down to the low-speed ranges by switching the
spindle motor connections. This is a system under which commands are assigned from the PLC.
4 Automatic coil switch                  
Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrums down to the low-speed ranges by switching the spindle
motor connections. This is a system under which the CNC module switches the coils automatically in accordance with the motor speed.
5 Encoder input I/F                   With this function, arbitrary pulse can be input by parameters set in R register.
2 S code output                  
When an 8-digit number following address S (S0 to S±99999999) is commanded, signed 32-bit binary data and start signal,
or non-signed 32-bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
3 Constant surface speed control                  
With radial direction cutting, this function enables the spindle speed to be changed in accordance with changes in the radial
direction coordinates and the workpiece to be cut with the cutting point always kept at a constant speed (constant surface speed).
4 Spindle override                  
This function applies override to the rotation speed of a spindle or milling spindle assigned by the machining program
command during automatic operation or by manual operation.
5 Multiple-spindle control
Multiple-spindle control is a function that controls all the spindles except the first spindle (main spindle) in a machine tool
equipped with the second, third and fourth spindles (sub-spindles) in addition to the first spindle.
1 Multiple-spindle control 1 – – – – – – – – –          This function controls the spindles in a machine tool equipped with several spindles.
2 Multiple-spindle control 2 –                 
With this function, commands to the spindle are performed with one S command, and a signal from the PLC determines
which spindle is selected.
6 Spindle orientation                   This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position.
7 Spindle position control (Spindle/C axis control)                   This function enables one spindle drive unit to be also used as the C axis (rotary axis) using an external signal.
8 Spindle synchronization
1 Spindle synchronization 1 – – – – – – – – – –         In a machine with two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one selected spindle
(synchronized spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other selected spindle (basic spindle). There are two
methods for giving commands: G code and PLC.2 Spindle synchronization 2 – – – – – – – – – –        
3 Guide bushing spindle synchronization – – – – – – – – – – – –      
This function is used for a machine with a spindle motor to rotate a guide bushing. It synchronizes the guide bushing spindle (G/
B spindle) with the spindle motor used as a reference (basic spindle).
9 Tool spindle synchronization 1 (Polygon)
1 Tool spindle synchronization 1 A (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon) – – – – – – – – – –        
With a machine equipped with two or more spindles under serial connection control, this function enables spindle-spindle
polygon machining (IA) by controlling the workpiece spindle rotation in synchronization with the rotary tool spindle rotation.
The rotary tool spindle and workpiece spindle are designated from the spindles subject to serial connection control.
2 Tool spindle synchronization 1 B (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon) – – – – – – – – – –        
With a machine equipped with two or more spindles under serial connection control, this function enables spindle-spindle
polygon machining (IB) by controlling the rotary tool spindle rotation in synchronization with the workpiece spindle rotation.
The rotary tool spindle and workpiece spindle are designated from the spindles subject to serial connection control.
3 Tool spindle synchronization 1 C (Spindle-NC axis, Polygon) – – – – – – – – – – –       
This function controls the workpiece (spindle) and tool (NC axis) so that they synchronously rotate at the commanded ratio,
allowing polygon machining.
10 Tool spindle synchronization 2 (Hobbing) – – – – – – – – – – –        This function is to cut the gear with a hob (hob cutter).
11 Spindle speed clamp                   The spindle rotation speed is clamped between max. rotation speed and min. rotation speed.
2 Tool functions (T)
1 Tool functions (T command)                  
The tool function is commanded with an 8-digit number following the address T (T0 to T99999999) to specify the tool No. In the
controller for a lathe, the tool compensation (tool length compensation, tool nose wear compensation) Nos. are also indicated.
3 Miscellaneous functions (M)
1 Miscellaneous functions                  
Miscellaneous function, or M function, is used to command auxiliary functions for NC, such as rotating the spindle forward/
backward or stopping it, as well as turning the cooling oil ON/OFF.
2 Multiple M codes in 1 block                   Up to four sets of M commands can be issued in a block.
3 M code independent output                  
When the M00, M01, M02 or M30 command is issued during an automatic operation (tape, memory, MDI) or by a manual numerical
command, the signal of this function is output. It is turned OFF after the miscellaneous function finishes or by the reset rewind signal.
4 Miscellaneous function finish                  
These signals inform the CNC system that a miscellaneous function (M), spindle function (S), tool function (T) or 2nd
miscellaneous function (A, B, C) has been issued, and that the PLC that has received it has completed the required
operation. They include miscellaneous function finish signal 1 (FIN1) and miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2).
5 M code output during axis traveling – – – – – – – – – – –       
This function controls the timing at which miscellaneous functions are output, and it outputs a miscellaneous function when
the axis reaches the designated position movement.
6 Miscellaneous Function Command High-speed Output                   This function shortens a processing time per miscellaneous function.
4 2nd miscellaneous functions (B)
1 2nd miscellaneous functions                  
The code data and start signals are output when an 8-digit number is assigned following the address code A, B or C —
whichever does not duplicate the axis name being used.
9 Tool compensation
1 Tool length/Tool position
1 Tool length compensation                  
These commands make it possible to control the axis movement by offsetting the position of the end point of the travel
command by the amount set in the tool compensation screen.
2 Tool position offset –         – – – – – – – – –
This function uses commands to control the movement by changing the end point positions of the movement commands to
positions which have been extended or reduced for a tool compensation amount.
3 Tool compensation for additional axes – – – – – – – – –         
The tool compensation for a lathe is valid for the X and Z axes. If an additional axis (Y axis) is added, the tool compensation
will be validated for the additional axis.
2 Tool radius
1 Tool radius compensation          – – – – – – – – –
This function provides tool radius compensation. Through a combination of the G command and D address assignment, the
actual tool center path is compensated either inside or outside the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the tool radius.
2 3-dimensional tool radius compensation – – –       – – – – – – – – –
This command serves the function of compensating the spherical radius of ball end mills. It compensates the actual tool
center path to be either more outside or inside the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the tool radius amount in
accordance with the 3-dimensional vectors.
3 Tool nose radius compensation (G40/41/42) – – – – – – – – –         
The tool nose of the specified tool No. is assumed to be a half circle of the radius R, and compensation is applied so that the
half circle touches the programmed path.
4 Automatic decision of nose radius compensation direction (G46/40) – – – – – – – – –          The nose radius compensation direction is automatically determined from the tool tip and the specified movement vector.

25 2625 26
Class
Series
Series
5 Tool radius compensation diameter designation –         – – – – – – – – –
Tool diameter designation handles the compensation amount as diameter value and compensates the amount set in the tool
compensation amount screen when tool radius compensation (G41/G42) is commanded.
3 Tool offset amount
1 Number of tool offset sets
1 20 sets – – – – – – – – – – – –      
The number of configurable sets of tool data such as tool length compensation and tool radius compensation.
2 40 sets – – –       – – – – – – – – –
3 80 sets – – – – – – – – –         
4 200 sets  – –       – – – – – – – – –
5 400 sets –         – – – – – – – – –
6 999 sets – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
7 (99 × number of part systems) sets – – – – – – – – – – – –      
2 Offset memory
1 Tool shape/wear offset amount                   This function registers the tool shape compensation and wear compensation amounts.
10 Coordinate system
1 Coordinate system type and setting
This shows the coordinate systems handled by the NC.
The points that can be commanded with the movement command are points in the local coordinate system or machine coordinate system.
1 Machine coordinate system                  
The machine coordinate system is used to express the prescribed positions (such as the tool change position and stroke
end position) that are specific to each machine, and it is automatically set immediately upon completion of the first dog-type
reference position return after power ON, or immediately after power ON if the absolute position specifications apply.
2 Coordinate system setting                   By issuing a G code, the program coordinate system (zero point of program) can be changed in the workpiece coordinate system.
3 Automatic coordinate system setting                  
After turning the power ON, even without executing the reference position return, the basic machine coordinate system and
the workpiece coordinate system are set automatically.
4 Workpiece coordinate system selection
1 Workpiece coordinate system selection (6 sets)                  
When multiple workpieces with the same shape are to be machined, these commands enable the same shape to be
machined by executing a single machining program in the coordinate system of each workpiece.
2 Extended workpiece coordinate system selection (48 sets) G54.1P1 to P48                  
In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59, 48/96 sets of workpiece coordinate systems can be used by
assigning G54.1Pn command.
3 Extended workpiece coordinate system selection (96 sets) G54.1P1 to P96 – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
4
Extended workpiece coordinate system
selection (300 sets) G54.1P1 to P300
– – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
5 External workpiece coordinate offset                  
An external workpiece coordinate offset that serves as a reference for all the workpiece coordinate systems is available outside
the workpiece coordinates. By setting the external workpiece coordinate offset, the external workpiece coordinate system can
be shifted, and all the workpiece coordinate systems can be simultaneously shifted by an amount equivalent to the offset.
6 Workpiece coordinate system preset (G92.1) – – –               
This function presets the workpiece coordinate system, which has been shifted by the programmed command or the manual
operation, as the workpiece coordinate system which has been offset by the programmed command (G92.1) from the
machine zero point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate offset amount.
7 Local coordinate system                  
This function is for assigning another coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system currently selected. This enables
the workpiece coordinate system to be changed temporarily.
8 Coordinate system for rotary axis                  
The rotary axis includes the rotating type (short-cut valid/invalid) or the linear type (workpiece coordinate position linear type,
all coordinate position linear type).
The workpiece coordinate position range is 0 to 359.999° for the rotating type, and 0 to 99999.999° for the linear type.
9 Plane selection                   By issuing a G code, it is possible to specify the planes for the arc, tool radius compensation, coordinate rotation and other commands.
10 Origin set/Origin cancel                  
Origin set is a function that shifts the coordinate system so that the current position is set as the zero point in the workpiece coordinate
system containing the workpiece coordinate system's offset value.
Origin cancel is a function that manually cancels all deviated amounts, and shifts to the designated zero point with the workpiece offset.
11 Counter set                   The relative position counter can be set to an arbitrary value from the setting and display unit screen.
2 Return
1 Manual reference position return                   This function enables the tool to be returned manually to a position specific to the machine (reference position).
2 Automatic 1st reference position return                  
By commanding the G code during an automatic operation, the 1st reference position return is executed. If an intermediate
point is commanded, a positioning is made to the point at rapid traverse rate, then each axis returns to its 1st reference position.
3 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return                  
As in the automatic 1st reference position return, by commanding the G code during an automatic operation, an axis returns
to a certain position specific to the machine (2nd/3rd/4th reference position).
4 Reference position check                  
By issuing a G code, a machining program where the tool is programmed to start off from the reference position and return to
the reference position can be checked if the tool will return successfully to the reference position.
5 Absolute position detection                  
With this function, a battery stores the relation of the actual machine position and the machine coordinate kept in the CNC
even during the power OFF, and an automatic operation is enabled without executing a reference position return.
6 Tool exchange position return                  
By specifying the tool change position in a parameter and also assigning a tool change position return command in a
machining program, the tool can be changed at the most appropriate position.
11 Operation support functions
1 Program control
1 Optional block skip                  
When “/” (slash code) is programmed at the head of a block, and the optional block skip input signal from the external source
is turned ON for automatic operation, the block with the “/” code is skipped.
2 Optional block skip addition –         –        
When “/n (n:1 to 9)” is programmed at the head of a block, and the optional block skip input n signal from the external source
is turned ON for automatic operation, the block with the “/n” code is skipped.
3 Single block                   The commands for automatic operation can be executed one block at a time (block stop) by turning ON the single block input signal.
2 Program test
1 Dry run                  
F code feed commands for automatic operation can be switched to the manual feedrate data of the machine operation board
by turning ON the dry run input signal.
2 Machine lock                   When the machine lock input signal is set to ON, the CNC operations can be executed without actually moving the NC axis.
3 Miscellaneous function lock                  
When the “External input” signal or “Miscellaneous function lock” signal is turned ON, the output signals of M, S, T, and B (2nd
miscellaneous function) will not be output to the PLC. This is useful when checking only travel commands in a program check.
4 Graphic check
1 Graphic check                  
This function traces the programmed movement path without executing an automatic operation. It enables three-dimensional
drawing and also rotary axis drawing. By using this function, machining programs can be checked before they are actually run.
* M70V TypeA requires a function expansion unit FCU7-HN721/HN722.
2 3D solid program check – –        – – – – – – – – –
3 Graphic check rotary axis drawing – – – – – – – – – – –
*
(HN721/HN722)
     
5 Graphic trace
1 Graphic trace                   This function traces the machine tool's machine positions. It draws the movement path of an actual automatic or manual
operation, and the tool tip movement path. The function also monitors the machine operations during machining. It enables
the drawing of a rotary axis as well.
* M70V TypeA requires a function expansion unit FCU7-HN721/HN722.
2 Graphic trace rotary axis drawing – – – – – – – – – – –
*
(HN721/HN722)
     
6 Machining time computation                   This function analyzes the machining program without moving the axis and calculates the approximate time required for machining.
3 Program search/start/stop
1 Program search                   This function specifies the program No. of the program to run automatically and calls the program.
2 Sequence number search                   Blocks can be indexed by setting the program No., sequence No. and block No. of the program to run automatically.
3 Verification stop –         –         This function enables the single block stop status to be established at any block without having to turn the SINGLE BLOCK switch ON.

27 2827 28
Class
Series
Series
4 Program restart                  
When a machining program is to be resumed after suspended midway due to tool damage or for some other reason, this
function searches the program and the block to resume and enables machining to be resumed from the block.
5 Automatic operation start                  
With the input of the automatic operation start signal (change from ON to OFF), automatic operation of the program that was
found by an operation search is started by the controller (or the halted program is restarted).
6 NC reset                   This function enables the controller to be reset.
7 Feed hold                   When the feed hold signal is set to ON during automatic operation, the machine feed is immediately decelerated and stopped.
8 Search Start                  
If the “Search Start” signal is input when the memory mode is selected, the designated machining program is searched and
executed from the beginning.
4 Interrupt operation
1 Manual interruption                   Manual interrupt is a function that enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation.
2 Automatic operation handle interruption                  
The handle command can interrupt and be superimposed onto a command without suspending automatic operation to move
the machine by rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation.
3 Manual absolute switch                  
The program absolute positions are updated by an amount equivalent to the distance by which the tool is moved manually
when the manual absolute switch signal is turned ON.
4 Thread cutting cycle retract – – – – – – – – – –         This function suspends the thread cutting cycle if a feed hold signal has been input during thread cutting cycle.
5 Tapping retract                  
If tapping is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop signal that is input during tapping and the tap is left engaged inside the
workpiece, the tap tool engaged inside the workpiece can be rotated in the reverse direction so that it will be disengaged by
inputting the tap retract signal.
6 Manual numerical value command                  
On the screen of the setting and display unit, the M, S and T (and B when 2nd miscellaneous function is valid) commands
can be executed by setting numerical values and pressing [INPUT].
7 Arbitrary reverse run – –        – – – – – – – – – This function allows a program to run the executed blocks backward after the block stop in the automatic operation.
8 MDI interruption                  
This function enables MDI programs to be executed during automatic operation in the single block stop status. When the
modal status is changed in a MDI program, the modal status in the automatic operation mode is also changed.
9 Simultaneous operation of manual and automatic modes                  
This function enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation by selecting an automatic operation
mode (tape, MDI or memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog or manual reference position return) simultaneously.
(Arbitrary feed based on the PLC is also possible.)
10 Simultaneous operation of JOG and handle modes                  
When executing the jog feed and handle feed, both these feeds are available without changing the mode each time by
inputting the jog mode signal and simultaneous operation of jog and handle modes signal to the control unit.
11 Reference position retract                  
When the retract signal is turned ON during the automatic and manual operation, this function can retract the tool immediately
to a set reference position.
12 Tool retract and return – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
Even if the machining program's operation is halted and the tool is retracted to change the tool or check the workpiece, etc.,
the tool can be returned to the halted point (machining halted point) and resume machining.
13 Skip retract –         – – – – – – – – – This function is used to return in the direction opposite the travel direction when the skip signal is input during G31 command.
14 PLC interruption –         –        
The interrupt program set with the R register is executed with the signals from the PLC during single block stop in program
operation or during the manual mode.
12 Program support functions
1 Machining method support functions
1 Program
1 Subprogram control  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers  8 layers
When the same pattern is repeated during machining, the machining pattern is registered as one subprogram, which can be called
from the main program as required, thereby realizing the same machining easily. This enables the efficient use of programs.
2 Figure rotation – – –       – – – – – – – – –
If the same pattern is used repeatedly on a concentric circle, one of the rotary machining patterns can be registered as a
subprogram. When the subprogram is called from the main program, if the rotation center is designated, a path similar to the
rotary phase can be easily created on the concentric circle. This simplifies the creation of a program.
3 Scaling          – – – – – – – – –
The shape commanded by a program can be extended or reduced to the desired size by applying a scale factor to the
movement axis command position.
4 Axis name switch – – – – – – – – – –         The axis name switch function switches the name of a command axis and a control axis.
2 Macro program
1 User macro  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers  4 layers
In order to execute one integrated function, a group of control and arithmetic instructions can be used and registered as a
macro program.
2 Machine tool builder macro –         –        
This function enables macro programs exclusively designed for use by a specific machine tool builder to be registered in
addition to the regular user macro programs.
3 Macro interruption                  
By inputting a user macro interrupt signal from the PLC, the program being currently executed is interrupted and other
programs can be called instead.
4 Variable command
1 100 sets – – –       – – –      
Programming can be made flexible and versatile by designating variables instead of directly assigning numbers to addresses
in programs and by supplying the values of those variables as required when running the programs.
Arithmetic operations (adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing) can also be conducted for the variables.
* M70V TypeA requires a memory expansion unit FCU7-HN754.
2 200 sets  – –        – –      
3 300 sets – – –       – – –      
4 600 sets – – –       –  –      
5 700 sets –         – –       
6 8000 sets – –
*
(HN754)
      – –
*
(HN754)
     
7 (50+50×number of part systems) sets – – –       – – –      
8 (100+100×number of part systems) sets – – –       – – –      
11 (600+100×number of part systems) sets – –        – –       
12 (7900+100×number of part systems) sets – –
*
(HN754)
      – –
*
(HN754)
     
3 Fixed cycle
1 Fixed cycle for drilling                  
These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block program. Special
fixed cycles must always be used in combination with fixed cycles.
2 Fixed cycle for drilling (Type 2) – – – – – – – – –         
3 Special fixed cycle          – – – – – – – – –
4 Fixed cycle for turning machining – – – – – – – – –         
The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting, etc. in the turning machining can be commanded in one
block. This function is useful for simplifying machining programs.
5 Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining – – – – – – – – –         
6 Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (Type 2) – – – – – – – – –         
7 Small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle –         – – – – – – – – –
In deep hole drilling, cutting and retract are repeated and the workpiece is machined multiple times. In addition, when PLC
signals are input during cutting, the cutting for the time concerned is skipped. In this way, the load applied to the tool is reduced.
4 Mirror image
1 Mirror image by parameter setting –         –         A parameter is used to designate the axis for which the mirror image function is to be executed before the machining program is run.
2 Mirror image by external input –         –         Signals from an external device (PLC) request the mirror image operation either during or before the execution of a machining program.
3 Mirror image by G code          – – – – – – – – –
Using a program for the left or right side of an image, this function can machine the other side of the image when a left/right
symmetrical shape is to be cut.
4 Mirror image for facing tool posts – – – – – – – – – – –       
With machines in which the base tool post and the facing tool post are integrated in one post, this function enables the
programs prepared for cutting at the base side to be executed by the tools on the facing side as well.

29 3029 30
Class
Series
Series
5 T code mirror image for facing tool posts – – – – – – – – – – –       
When tools that correspond to tool Nos. 1 to 64 are selected (T commands) but these are the tool Nos. for which the facing
tool post mirror image function has already been designated with a parameter, the status equivalent to G68 (facing tool post
mirror image ON) is established.
5 Coordinate system operation
1 Coordinate rotation by program          – –       
When it is necessary to machine a complicated shape at a position that has been rotated with respect to the coordinate
system, you can machine a rotated shape by programming the shape prior to rotation on the local coordinate system, and
then specifying the parallel shift amount and rotation angle by means of this coordinate rotation command.
2 Coordinate rotation by parameter – – –       – – – – – – – – –
If a deviation occurs between the workpiece alignment line and the machine coordinate system's coordinate axis when the workpiece is
mounted, the machine can be controlled to rotate the machining program coordinates according to the workpiece alignment line deviation.
3 3-dimensional coordinate conversion – – –       – – – – – – – – –
With the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion function, a new coordinate system can be defined by rotating and moving in
parallel the zero point in respect to the X, Y and Z axes of the currently set workpiece coordinate system.
6 Dimension input
1 Corner chamfering/Corner R                  
This function executes corner processing by automatically inserting a straight line or arc in the commanded amount between
two consecutive travel blocks.
2 Linear angle command                  
The end point coordinates are automatically calculated by assigning one element (one component of the selected plane) of
the end point coordinates and the linear angle.
3 Geometric command                  
When it is difficult to find the intersection point of two straight lines with a continuous linear interpolation command, this point
can be calculated automatically by programming the command for the angle of the straight lines.
4 Polar coordinate command –         – – – – – – – – – With this function, the end point position is commanded with the radius and angle.
7 Axis control
1 Chopping
1 Chopping –         –        
This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of program operation. During the grinding
operation, chopping can produce a better surface accuracy than using abrasive grain.
2 Normal line control – –        – – – – – – – – –
This function controls the swiveling of the C axis (rotary axis) so that the tool is always pointing in the normal line direction for
the X and Y axes movement commands during program operation.
3 Circular cutting          – – – – – – – – –
In circular cutting, a system of cutting steps are performed; first, the tool departs from the center of the circle, and by cutting
along the inside circumference of the circle, it draws a complete circle, then it returns to the center of the circle.
8 Multi-part system control
1 Timing synchronization between part systems – –        – –       
The multi-axis, multi-part system compound control CNC system can simultaneously run multiple machining programs
independently. This function is used in cases when, at some particular point during operation, the operations of different part
systems are to be synchronized or in cases when the operation of only one part system is required.
2 Start point designation timing synchronization – –        – –        The synchronizing point can be placed in the middle of a block by designating the start point.
3 Mixed control (cross axis control)
1 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) 1 – – – – – – – – – – –        This function enables any axis to be replaced with another axis between part systems. There are two methods for giving
commands: G code and PLC.2 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) 2 – – – – – – – – – – –       
4 Control axis superimposition
1 Control Axis Superimposition 1 – – – – – – – – – – – –       This function enables to superimpose on and control an axis in a part system with an axis in another part system. There are
two methods for giving commands: G code and PLC.2 Control Axis Superimposition 2 – – – – – – – – – – – –      
5 Control axis synchronization across part systems
1 Control Axis Synchronization Across Part System 1 – – – – – – – – – – –        Synchronization control enables an arbitrary control axis in another part system to move in synchronization with the
movement command assigned to an arbitrary control axis. There are two methods for giving commands: G code and PLC.2 Control Axis Synchronization Across Part System 2 – – – – – – – – – – –       
6 Balance cut – – – – – – – – – – –       
The deflection can be minimized by holding tools simultaneously from both sides of the workpiece and using them in
synchronization to machine the workpiece (balance cutting). In addition, since the workpiece is machined by two tools, the
machining time is reduced.
7 Common memory for part systems – – – – – – – – – – –       
For a machine with multiple part systems, the common variables and tool compensation memory which exist for each part
system can be made common to all part systems by setting the parameters.
8 2-part system synchronous thread cutting – – – – – – – – – – –        This function performs synchronous thread cutting for the same spindle using the 1st and 2nd part systems.
9 Multi-part system program management – –        – –        Separate programs, used in each part system, can be managed under a common name in a multi-part system.
9 Data input by program
1 Parameter input by program                   The parameters set from the display can be changed using machining programs.
2 Compensation data input by program                  
The value of the workpiece coordinate systems selected can be set or changed using program commands.
The tool compensation amounts, that are set from the display can be input using program commands.
10 Machining modal
1 Tapping mode                   When tapping mode commands are issued, the CNC system is set to the internal control modes required for tapping.
2 Cutting mode                   When a cutting mode command is issued, the CNC system is set to the cutting mode that enables a smoothly cut surface.
2 Machining accuracy support functions
1 Automatic corner override                  
To prevent machining surface distortion due to increase in the cutting load when cutting corners, this function automatically
applies an override on the cutting feedrate so that the cutting amount is not increased for a set time at the corner.
2 Deceleration check
1 Exact stop check mode                  
This function decelerates and stops a motor before executing the next block, which reduces the impact on the machine
caused by a rapid change of feedrate, and prevents a corner from being machined round.
2 Exact stop check                  
3 Error detection                  
4 Programmable in-position check                  
3 High-speed and high-accuracy functions[kBPM:k Block per Minute]
1 High-speed machining mode 1 (G5P1) Max. [kBPM] –  8.4  16.8  16.8  16.8  16.8  16.8  16.8  16.8 – – – – – – – – –
This function runs a machining program that approximates a free curve with fine segments at a high speed.
2 High-speed machining mode 2 (G5P2) Max. [kBPM] – –  33.7  67.5  168  168  67.5  168  168 – – – – – – – – –
3
High-speed high-accuracy control 1 (G5.1Q1) Max.
[kBPM] (1st part system only)
–  16.8  16.8  16.8  33.7  33.7  16.8  33.7  33.7 – – – – – – – – – This function runs machining programs, in which free-form curved surfaces have been approximated by fine segments, at a
high speed and with a high accuracy.
If the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, 2nd part system can be performed at the same time.4
High-speed high-accuracy control 2 (G5P10000) Max.
[kBPM] (limited to 1-part system configuration)
– –  33.7  67.5  168  168  67.5  168  168 – – – – – – – – –
5
High-accuracy control1 (G61.1/G08)
–         – – – – – – – – –
This function controls the operation so the lag will be eliminated in control systems and servo systems. With this function,
improved machining accuracy can be realized, especially during high-speed machining, and machining time can be reduced.
If the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, 2nd part system can be performed at the same time.
6
High-accuracy spline interpolation1 (G61.2)
– –        – – – – – – – – –
This function automatically generates spline curves that smoothly pass through rows of dots designated by a fine-segment
machining program, and performs interpolation for the paths along the curves.
8 SSS control
1 SSS control (1st part system only) – –
*
(HN722)
      – – – – – – – – –
With SSS (Super Smooth Surface) control, the large area path information is used instead of just the angle between the
blocks. Thus, optimum speed control that is not adversely affected by minute steps or waviness is possible. This enables
machining with a fewer scratches and streaks on the cutting surface compared to the normal high-accuracy control function.
If the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, 2nd part system can be performed at the same time.
* M70V TypeA requires a function expansion unit FCU7-HN722.
9
High-accuracy acceleration/deceleration time constant
extension (1st part system only)
– – –       – – – – – – – – –
This extends the upper limit of cutting feed time constant from 5,000[ms] to 30,000[ms] for acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation.
10 Machining condition selection 1 (1st part system only) –         – – – – – – – – –
The machining condition parameter set which consists of parameters related to the high-accuracy control can be configured
in advance for each machining application (such as part machining or die machining) or machining process (such as rough or
finishing), and it can be switched according to the purpose.

31 3231 32
Class
Series
Series
12 Direct command mode – – – – – – – – – – – – –   –  
By reducing the load applied during the NC program analysis and interpolation to the minimum possible level, the machining
programs expressed in fine segments are executed at a high processing speed.
13 High-accuracy Control in 2 Part Systems – – –       – – – – – – – – –
The high-accuracy control can be operated in two part systems at the same time.
(Note) One or more of the options High-accuracy control, High-speed high-accuracy control 1 or High-speed high-accuracy
control 2 must be combined with this function to implement high-accuracy or high-speed high-accuracy control.
4 Programming support functions
1 Playback          – – –      
This function enables creation of a program while proceeding with sample machining by manual (handle or job) feed or
mechanical handle feed.
3 Simple programming –         –         Create a part program by using NAVI MILL (for machining center system) or NAVI LATHE (for lathe system).
4 G code guidance *         *        
G code guidance is a function to display illustration of the contents or movements of the commanded format for the G code
currently under editing. This is used when creating or editing a machining program.
13 Machine accuracy compensation
1 Static accuracy compensation
1 Backlash compensation                   This function compensates the error (backlash) produced when the direction of the machine system is reversed.
2 Memory-type pitch error compensation                  
Machine accuracy can be improved by compensating the errors in the screw pitch intervals among the mechanical errors
(production errors, wear, etc.) of the feed screws.
3 Memory-type relative position error compensation                   Machine accuracy can be improved by compensating the relative error between machine axes, such as a production error or aging.
4 External machine coordinate system compensation                  
The coordinate system can be shifted by inputting a compensation amount from the PLC. This compensation amount will not
appear on the counters (all counters including machine position).
5 Circular error radius compensation –         –        
With commands designated during arc cutting, this function compensates movement toward the inside of the arcs caused by
a factor such as servo delay.
6 Ball screw thermal expansion compensation –         –         This compensates the axis feed error caused by a ball screw's thermal expansion, etc. using the values set by the PLC.
7 Machine rotation center error compensation – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
In a machine with a rotary axis, there may be a case where the actual rotation center deviates from the programmed rotation center. (In
other words, “machine rotation center error” may be observed.) Higher accuracy machining can be realized by compensating this error.
8
Position-dependent gradually increasing-type backlash
compensation
–         –        
With this function, the gradually increasing-type lost motion which depends on the distance from the point where the machine
movement direction is reversed can be compensated by controlling the variation of backlash compensation amount according
to the distance from the direction reversal point.
9 Two-way pitch error compensation –         –        
Two-way pitch error compensation function is used to compensate the pitch error in each direction by setting the pitch error
compensation amount when moving in the positive and negative direction.
2 Dynamic accuracy compensation
1 Smooth high-gain (SHG) control                  
This is a high-response and stable position control method using the servo system. SHG control realizes an approximately
three-fold position loop gain compared to the conventional control method.
2 Dual feedback                  
Use position feedback with a motor-side detector in ranges with high acceleration to enable stable control. In ranges with low
acceleration, use position feedback with the machine-side detector (scale). This will make it possible to increase the position
loop gain. A machine-side detector (scale) is separately required.
3 Lost motion compensation                  
This function compensates the error in protrusion shapes caused by lost motion at the arc quadrant changeover section
during circular cutting.
4 OMR 2 (Backlash with filter) –         –        
The OMR (Optimal Machine Response) control function estimates the machine or motor model (moment of inertia, clone
friction, viscosity coefficient, etc.) that can cause a path error (deviation of the actual tool path from the programmed path).
High-accuracy machining is achieved by carrying out feed forward control based on that model. This allows error cased by
quadrant protrusions during circular interpolation or quadrants on the inner side of the path to be greatly reduced.
OMR-2 is a function that focuses on the quadrant protrusions, and improves the path error with this. Quadrant path
compensation is included in OMR-2.
6 OMR-FF – – –       – – – – – – – – –
OMR-FF control enables fine control by generating feed forward inside the drive unit and can realize the strict feedback
control to the program command than the conventional high-speed accuracy control.
7 Distance-coded reference position detection – – –       – – –       This is a function where a distance-coded reference scale is used to establish the reference point in the relative position detection system.
14 Automation support functions
1 Measurement
1 Skip
1 Skip                  
When the external skip signal is input during linear interpolation using the G31 command, machine feeding is stopped
immediately and the remaining distance is discarded to execute the commands in the next block.
2 Multiple-step skip                   This function realizes skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command.
4 PLC skip –         –         This function enables skip operations to be performed by signals which are input from the user PLC.
5 Speed change skip – – –       – – –       This function is used to change the feed rate or to stop the movement by inputting the skip signal during the linear interpolation.
2 Automatic tool length measurement                  
This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by the commanded value between the measurement
start position and measurement position. It stops the tool as soon as it reaches the sensor and calculates the difference between the
coordinates where the tool has stopped and the command coordinates. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount
for that tool.
3 Manual tool length measurement 1                   Simple measurement of the tool length is done without a sensor.
4 Manual tool length measurement 2                  
[M system] When the tool is positioned at the reference position, this function measures the distance from the reference
position to the tool tip and registered it as the tool length compensation amount.
[L system] A device with a built-in touch sensor is used. Simply by causing the tool nose to touch the touch sensor in manual
feed, the tool compensation amount can be calculated and stored in tool compensation amount memory.
5 Workpiece coordinate offset measurement – – – – – – – – – –        
The external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z axis can be set by cutting the workpiece face by means of manual
operations and inputting the workpiece measurement signal.
6 Workpiece position measurement –         – – – – – – – – –
The workpiece position measurement function is used to measure each axis' coordinate by installing a sensor on the spindle
and the sensor contacting the workpiece with the manual feed or handle feed.
The surface, hole center and width center coordinates are calculated from the measured coordinates, and those calculated
results are set in the workpiece coordinate offset.
7 Rotation measurement –         – – – – – – – – –
The offset of the rotary coordinate system (rotation center and rotation angle) is measured, and the results are set to the
workpiece coordinate system offset (rotation center) and the parameters.
2 Tool life management
1 Tool life management
1 Tool life management 1                   The tool usage is monitored by accumulating each tool's usage time or the frequency of use.
2 Tool life management 2                  
[M system] A spare tool change function is added to the tool life management 1.
[L system] The life of each tool (time and frequency) is controlled, and when the life is reached, a spare tool of the same type
is selected from the same group.
3 Tool life management 3          – – – – – – – – –
The tool usage is monitored by accumulating each tool's usage time and the frequency of use. This function is not controlled
by the group No.
2 Number of tool life management sets
1 80 sets – – – – – – – – –         
The max. sets of tools available for tool life management
2 200 sets          – – – – – – – – –
3 400 sets – – –       – – – – – – – – –
4 600 sets – – –       – – – – – – – – –
5 800 sets – – –       – – – – – – – – –
6 1000 sets – – –       – – – – – – – – –

33 3433 34
Class
Series
Series
3 Others
1 Programmable current limitation                  
This function allows the current limit value of the NC axis to be changed to a desired value in the program, and is used for
the workpiece stopper, etc.
2 Auto power off – – –       – – –      
Auto power OFF function notifies that the control unit's power can be turned OFF after shutting the display unit down by
entering “automatic power OFF request” signal from user PLC to NC.
4 Load monitoring1 – – –       – – –      
This function aims at detecting tool wear or degradation by detecting and monitoring the actual load (current value) on
spindle and NC axes on a real time basis.
15 Safety and maintenance
1 Safety switches
1 Emergency stop                  
All operations are stopped by the emergency stop signal input and, at the same time, the drive section is stopped and the
movement of the machine is stopped.
2 Data protection key                  
With the input from the user PLC, it is possible to prohibit the parameter setting or deletion, and the program edit from the
setting and display unit.
2 Display for ensuring safety
1 NC warning                  
Warnings are output by the CNC system. When one of these warnings occurs, a warning number is output to the PLC and a
description of the warning appears on the screen. Operation can be continued without taking further action.
2 NC alarm                  
The alarms are output by the CNC system. When one of these alarms occurs, an alarm number is output to the PLC, and a
description of the alarm appears on the screen. Operation cannot be continued without taking remedial action.
3 Operation stop cause                   The stop cause of automatic operation is shown on the display.
4 Emergency stop cause                  
When the “EMG” (emergency stop) message is displayed in the operation status area of the display, the cause of the
emergency stop can be confirmed.
5 Thermal detection                   When overheating is detected in the control unit, an overheat signal is output at the same time as the alarm is displayed.
6 Battery alarm/warning                   When it is time to change the batteries, an alarm and warning are displayed.
3 Protection
1 Stroke end (Over travel)                  
Limit switches and dogs are attached to the machine, and when a limit switch has kicked a dog, the movement of the
machine is stopped by the signal input from the limit switch.
2 Stored stroke limit
1 Stored stroke limit 1/2                  
This function sets the areas prohibited for the tool to enter. There are multiple types of prohibitions according to the prohibited
range and method.
2 Stored stroke limit 1B –         –        
3 Stored stroke limit 2B –         –        
4 Stored stroke limit 1C –         –        
3 Stroke check before travel –         – – – – – – – – –
By commanding, from the program, the boundary for prohibiting machine entry as a coordinate position in the machine
coordinate system, entry into the inner side of that boundary can be prohibited.
4 Chuck/Tailstock barrier check – – – – – – – – –         
By limiting the tool nose point movement range, this function prevents the tool from colliding with the chuck or tail stock
because of a programming error.
5 Interlock                  
The machine movement will decelerate and stop as soon as the interlock signal, serving as the external input, is turned ON.
When the interlock signal is turned OFF, the machine starts moving again.
6 External deceleration                  
This function reduces the feedrate to the deceleration speed set by the parameter when the external deceleration input signal
has been set to ON.
8 3D Machine Interference check – – – – – – –   – – – – – – – – – When a possible collision is detected in a machine model registered beforehand, the motor decelerates to a stop and avoids collision.
9 Door interlock
1 Door interlock 1                   Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the opening of any protection doors
while a machine is moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates, stops all the control axes, establishes the
ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo drive units so that the motors are no longer driven.
2 Door interlock 2                  
10 Parameter lock                   This function is used to prohibit the changing of machine parameters.
11 Program protection (Edit lock B, C)                  
The edit lock function B or C inhibits machining program B or C (group by machining program numbers) from being edited or
erased when these programs require protection.
12 Program display lock                  
This function allows the display of only a target program (label address 9000) to be disabled for the program display in the
monitor screen, etc.
13 Safety observation                  
The safety observation function ensures safe access to the machine's working parts (e.g. for adjustment or preparation)
without shutting off the power, which reduces the time required to restart the machine.
14 Vertical axis pull-up                  
This function prevents the tool from breakage, through pulling up the cutting tool during emergency stop or instantaneous
power interruption at low cutting speed.
4 Maintenance and troubleshooting
1 Operation history                  
This is a maintenance function which is useful for tracing down the history and NC operation information and analyzing
problems, etc. This information is saved in the history data file, and can be displayed on the screen and output to a file.
2 Data sampling                  
The NC data sampling function samples the NC internal data (speed output from NC to drive unit, and feedback data from
the drive unit, etc.). This data can be output as text data.
3 NC data backup                   The NC data back up function backs up the NC parameters, etc., on an HD or IC card. The data can also be restored.
5 Servo turning support tool
1 MS Configurator (Note 1) –         –        
With this function, the servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by connecting the CNC and MS Configurator, which is
an application that runs on a regular personal computer. (available for free download from the MITSUBISHI CNC website)
2 NC Analyzer (Note 2)                  
With this function, the servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by connecting the CNC and NC Analyzer, which is an
application that runs on a regular personal computer.
6 Automatic backup                   With this function, system data, ladder program and custom software can be automatically backed up in case of system failure.
7 System setup                   System setup function enables automatic settings for the NC's initial startup just by inputting the minimum required items.
11 Application error detection – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
Application error detection function observes applications such as MITSUBISHI standard screen or custom screen. When an
error such as screen lock is detected, this function saves information and data in the log to investigate the causes easily.
12 NC Maintainer (Note 3) – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
This software tool runs on a personal computer to perform maintenance (parameter setting, NC diagnosis, ladder diagnosis,
etc.) for the MITSUBISHI CNCs with customer-supplied display units.
13 Parameter setup support tool
1 NC Configurator2 (Note 4)                  
This software tool runs on a personal computer to edit the NC data files required for NC control and machine operations such
as parameters, tool data and common variables.
16 Drive system
1 Servo/Spindle
1 Feed axis
(Note 1) This tool is free of charge. Please contact us.
(Note 2) Please contact us to purchase this tool.
(Note 3) This function is an option. The separate software is required.
(Note 4) Please contact us to purchase a full function version. A limited function version is also available free of charge.

35 3635 36
Class
Series
Series
5 MDS-D2-V1/D2-V2/D2-V3 (200V)
CNC-dedicated drive units, spindle motors, and servo motors are used.
1 Servo motor: HF-A48 (260kp/rev) –         –        
6 Servo motor: HF-KPJW04 (260kp/rev) –         –        
6 MDS-DH2-V1/DH2-V2 (400V)
2 Servo motor: HF-H-A51 (1000kp/rev) –         –        
3 Servo motor: HF-H-A74 (16000kp/rev) –         –        
7 MDS-DJ-V1(200V)
1 Servo motor: HF-A48 (260kp/rev)                  
3 Servo motor: HF-KPJW04 (260kp/rev)                  
8 MDS-DM2-SPV2/SPV3 (200V)
2 Spindle
6 MDS-D2-SP (200V) –         –        
7 MDS-DH2-SP (400V) –         –        
8 MDS-D2-SP2 (200V) –         –        
CNC-dedicated drive units, spindle motors, and servo motors are used.
9 MDS-DJ-SP (200V)                  
10 MDS-DM2-SPV2/SPV3/SPHV3 (200V)                  
3 Auxiliary axis
1 Indexing/Positioning servo:MR-J2-CT – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
1 Servo motor: HC-SF/HC-RF (16kp/rev) – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
2 Servo motor: HA-FF/HC-MF (8kp/rev) – – – – – –    – – – – – –   
4 Power supply
3 Power supply: MDS-D2-CV (200V) –         –        
4 Power supply: MDS-DH2-CV (400V) –         –        
5 AC reactor for power supply                  
6 Ground plate                  
17 Machine support functions
1 PLC
1 Built-in PLC processing mode                  
An exclusive sequence program that controls various signals between the controller and the machine to realize the
operations applicable to each machine can be created and built in.
2 PLC functions
1 Built-in PLC basic function   

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.
  

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.

*Index
qualification
is available.
Basic commands (bit processing commands) : 43 commands including LD, LDI, OR, ORI, AND, ANI, OUT, PLS, etc.
Function commands : 188 commands including data transfer, 4 basic arithmetic operations, logic arithmetic operations, large/
small identification, binary/BCD conversion, branching, conditional branching, decoding, encoding, etc.
2 PLC exclusive instruction –         –        
PLC-dedicated instruction is provided for some limited applications, enabling a complex machining process, which is difficult
to carry out only by the basic instructions and function instructions.
3 PLC support functions
1 Alarm message display                  
The contents of the alarms which have occurred during sequence (user PLC) processing can be displayed on the setting and
display unit.
2 Operator message display                  
When some conditions occur where you wish to inform a messages to the operator, an operator message can be displayed
separately from the alarm message.
3 Memory switch (PLC switch)
1 PLC switch 32 points                  
PLC switches can be set on the setting and display unit screen, and the ON/OFF control executed.
2 PLC switch 64 points – – –       – – –      
4 Load meter display                   A load meter can be displayed on the setting and display unit.
5 User PLC version display                   The user PLC version can be displayed in the software list on the Software Configuration screen.
6 Multi-ladder program register and execution                   This function stores and executes more than one sequence program.
7 Ladder program writing during RUN                   Ladder program can be edited while PLC is running.
8 PLC protection                   A keyword can be set to protect the sequence programs stored in the CNC.
4 Built-in PLC capacity
1 Standard PLC capacity

8000

20000

32000

64000

64000

64000

64000

64000

64000

8000

20000

32000

64000

64000

64000

64000

64000

64000 In the program memory, it is possible to store the system area of parameters, intelligent function module parameters,
sequence programs, device comments, and device initial values.
2 Large PLC capacity – – –

128000

128000

128000

128000

128000

128000
– – –

128000

128000

128000

128000

128000

128000
5 Machine contact input/output I/F                  
The operation panel I/O unit or the remote I/O unit is selected based on the types of signals (sink/source) available for input
or output and the number of contacts required.
6 Ladder monitor                   This function enables the operating status of the sequence circuit to be checked on the controller's setting and display unit.
7 PLC development
1 On-board development                  
On-board refers generically to the PLC related operations carried out with the CNC unit.
The Mitsubishi CNC on-board realizes functions and operations similar to the MELSEC Series ladder development tool (GX
Developer).
2 MELSEC development tool (GX Developer) (Need separate PC S/W)                   This function enables the data of the PLC contained inside the NC system to be developed and debugged using the GX Developer.
8 PLC parameter
1 PLC constant (150 points)                   The PLC constants set with the data type, and the bit selection parameters set with the bit types can be specified on the
screen as the parameters to use in the built-in PLC.2 PLC constant extension (Up to 755 points) – – –       – – –      
10 Pallet program registration – – –       – – – – – – – – –
Pallet program function assists the machining setups as it allows machining programs to be registered for each pallet of the
auto pallet changer.
11 Additional PLC engine – –  – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – This function improves the performance of processing PLC programs.
2 Machine construction
1 Servo OFF                  
When the servo OFF signal (per axis) is input, the corresponding axis is set in the servo OFF state. When the moving axis is
mechanically clamped, this function is designed to prevent the servo motor from being overloaded by the clamping force.
2 Axis detachment                   This function enables the control axis to be released from control.
3 Synchronous control –         –        
The synchronous control is a control method whereby both primary and secondary axes are controlled with the same travel
command by designating the travel command for the primary axis also to the secondary axis. This function is assumed to be
used in such equipment as large machine tools, which drive one axis with two servo motors.
4 Inclined axis control – – – – – – – – –         
Even when the control axes in a machine are mounted at an angle other than 90 degrees, this function enables it to be
programmed and controlled in the same way as with an orthogonal axis.

37 3837 38
Class
Series
Series
5 Position switch  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24  24
Instead of a dog switch on a machine's axis, a hypothetical dog switch is established using a parameter to set a coordinate position to
show the axis name and the hypothetical dog position. When the machine reaches the position, a signal is output to the PLC interface.
7 Index table indexing –         –         The indexing of the index table can be performed by setting the index axes.
8 Auxiliary axis control (J2-CT) – – – – – –    – – – – – –    The MR-J2-CT drive unit for positioning and indexing can be connected for auxiliary axis control.
9 Tool length compensation along the tool axis – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
(1) Changing the tool length compensation along the tool axis and compensation amount
Even if the tool axis direction is not the Z axis direction because the rotary axis is rotated, the tool can be compensated in
the tool axis direction.
(2) Machine configuration
The tool length compensation along the tool axis is carried out in respect to the direction of the tool nose axis (rotary axis).
10 Tool handle feed interruption – – – –   –   – – – – – – – – –
This function makes it possible to move the axis with the manual pulse generator in the tool axis direction, tool diameter
direction X and tool diameter direction Y in the hypothetical coordinate system over the tool axis.
11 Tool center coordinate display – – – – –  – –  – – – – – – – – –
The tool center coordinates, handle interrupt amount (tool axis movement) and tool center point speed are displayed during the
tool center point control function, tool length compensation along the tool axis function, and tool handle feed interrupt function
(tool axis direction handle feed, tool handle interrupt, tool diameter direction handle feed, nose center rotation handle feed).
12 Tool center point control – – – – –  – –  – – – – – – – – –
This function controls so that the position command in a machining program is at the tool center point in the coordinate
system (table coordinate system) which rotates together with the workpiece.
13 Inclined surface machining command – – –       – – – – – – – – – An arbitrary spatial plane defined with this function can be machined using normal program commands.
14 Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining – – –       – – – – – – – – –
This function is to compensate the tool radius in a 5-axis machine with two rotary axes, in accordance with the change of the
workpiece direction and inclination of the tool due to the movement of the rotary axis.
15 Workpiece installation error compensation – – – – –  – –  – – – – – – – – –
This function is used for a 5-axis machine. This compensates the error when a workpiece is placed off the workpiece
coordinate system to enable machining according to the program.
16 Manual feed for 5-axis machining – – –       – – – – – – – – –
By selecting the hypothetical coordinate system to be machined, the axis can be moved with manual feed (JOG, HANDLE or
INCREMENTAL) in the coordinate system with this function.
17 R-Navi – – –       – – – – – – – – – This provides easy setup of index machining (multiple/inclined surface machining) using a rotary axis.
3 PLC operation
1 Arbitrary feed in manual mode                   This function enables the feed directions and feed rates of the control axes to be controlled using commands from the user PLC.
2 Circular feed in manual mode – – –       – – –      
By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate from the user PLC, oblique linear interpolation or circular
interpolation is executed with jog/handle feed, manual rapid traverse or incremental feed of either X axis or Y axis.
3 PLC axis control                   This function allows independent axes to be controlled with PLC-based commands, separately from the NC control axes.
5 PLC axis indexing                  
By setting positioning points (stations) in advance, positioning control can be performed simply by designating a positioning
point No. (station No.).
4 PLC interface
1 CNC control signal                  
Control commands to the CNC system are assigned from the PLC. Input signals with skip inputs that respond at high speed
can also be used.
2 CNC status signal                   The status signals are output from the CNC system. They can be utilized by referencing them from the PLC.
3 PLC window                  
This function uses the “read window” or “write window” assigned to the R register's user area to read and write the CNC
operation status, axis information, parameters and tool data, etc.
4 External search                  
This function enables searching of the program to automatically start from the PLC. The program No., block No. and
sequence No. can be designated. In addition, the details of the search in progress can be read.
5 Machine contact I/O
1 Additional DI/DO (DI:32/DO:32)                   The number of DI/DO points that can be equipped on the machine operation panel is 64/64 as standard, and 96/96 at
maximum.2 Additional DI/DO (DI:64/DO:64)                  
3 Remote I/O 32/32                   The remote I/O unit equipped with the maximum number of DI/DO points is the one with 64 points for DI and 48 points for
DO. Multiple remote I/O units can be used as long as the total number of occupied stations is eight or less.4 Remote I/O 64/48                  
5 MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel                  
It is a machine operation panel supplied by Mitsubishi. Its keyboard layout can be changed according to the specifications of
the machine.
6 External PLC link
3 CC-Link (Master/Slave) –

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN576/HN577)

(HN576/HN577)

(HN576/HN577)
–

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN746)

(HN576/HN577)

(HN576/HN577)

(HN576/HN577)
NC unit can be directly connected to the network to serve as the master/local station of the MELSEC CC-Link.
4 PROFIBUS-DP (Master) – – – – – –

(HN571)

(HN571)

(HN571)
– – – – – –

(HN571)

(HN571)

(HN571)
The slave stations that support the PROFIBUS-DP communication can be connected to input/output device.
5 DeviceNet (Master) – – –

(HN747)

(HN747)

(HN747)
– – – – – –

(HN747)

(HN747)

(HN747)
– – –
MELSEC-Q series I/O intelligent function unit can be connected with NC.
6 FL-net – – –

(HN747)

(HN747)

(HN747)
– – – – – –

(HN747)

(HN747)

(HN747)
– – –
7 Installing S/W for machine tools
1 Customization (NC Designer) (Note 2)                  
1 Customization data storage capacity [MByte] 1
3
6
(HN754)
3
6
(HN754)
6 6 6
Depending
on hard
disk space
Depending
on hard
disk space
Depending
on hard
disk space
1
3
6
(HN754)
3
6
(HN754)
6 6 6
Depending
on hard
disk space
Depending
on hard
disk space
Depending
on hard
disk space
It is an optional function that allows a user-created screen or window to be displayed as an HMI screen or another application
on the screen.
2 Customization workpiece data size [MByte] 1 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6
2 User-defined key – – –       – – –       This function allows an arbitrary character string to be assigned to a key and makes it easy to input a typical character string.
3 EZSocket I/F (Note 2)                   This middleware makes it easy to develop applications having the Windows interface.
4 APLC release (Note 2)                  
APLC (Advanced Programmable Logic Controller) release is a function that allows the user-generated C language module to
be called from the NC.
Control operations that are difficult to express in a sequence program can be created with the C language.
8 Others
1 System lock                   This function locks the operations of the NC if the release code is not entered before the specified time limit.
2 CNC Remote Operation Tool
1 NC Monitor (Note 2) –         –         NC Monitor is a PC software tool that monitors information in the NC unit connected with the Ethernet.
2 NC Explorer (Note 1) –         –        
NC Explorer is a software tool to operate the machining data files of each NC unit connected with a host personal computer
by Ethernet connection from the Explorer on the host personal computer.
3 Automatic operation lock –         –         Automatic operation lock function prevents the falsification of APLC (C language module) by a third party.
(Note 1) This tool is free of charge. Please contact us.
(Note 2) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

39 4039 40
DrivesystemDriveunitoutline
DrivesystemDriveunitoutline
1
Drive system Drive unit outline
Servo Motors
Spindle Motors
 HF Series
• Medium-inertia, high-accuracy and
high-speed motors
• High-inertia machine accuracy is
ensured. Suitable for machines
requiring quick acceleration.
• Range: 0.5 to 9 [kW]
• Maximum speed: 4,000 or 5,000 [r/min]
• Supports three types of detectors with a
resolution of 260,000, 1 million or 16
million p/rev.
 Linear Servo Motor LM-F Series
• Use in clean environments is possible since
no ball screws are used and therefore
contamination from grease is not an issue.
• Elimination of transmission mechanisms which
include backlash, enables smooth and quiet
operation even at high speeds.
• Dimensions:
Length: 290 to 1,010 [mm]
Width: 120 to 240 [mm]
 HF-KP Series
• Small-capacity, low-inertia motors
• Suitable for an auxiliary axis that
require high-speed positioning
• Range: 0.1 to 0.75[kW]
• Maximum speed: 6,000 [r/min]
• Supports a detector with a resolution
of 260,000p/rev.
 Direct Drive Servo Motor TM-RB Series
• High-torque direct-drive combined motor
with a high-gain control system
provides quick acceleration and
positioning, which makes rotation
smoother.
• Suitable for a rotary axis that drives a
table or spindle head.
• Compared with a conventional rotary
axis with a deceleration gear, this
motor has higher accuracy and is
maintenance-free, having no wear or
backlash.
• Range:
Maximum torque: 36 to 1,280 [N·m]
 High-performance New Type Spindle Motor SJ-D Series
• Motor energy loss has been significantly
reduced by optimizing the magnetic circuit.
• High-speed-specification bearings are
equipped as standard, achieving higher-
speed, lower vibration and improved
durability.
• Product line:
Normal SJ-D Series 3.7 to 11 [kW]
Compact light SJ-DJ Series 5.5 to 15 [kW]
 Low-inertia, High-speed New Type
Spindle Motor SJ-DL Series
• Tapping machine-dedicated spindle
motors have joined the new spindle motor
line SJ-D Series in an effort to speed up
drilling and tapping.
• Our cutting-edge design technologies
have brought forth higher rigidity and
lower vibration of motor despite its light
weight.
• The low-inertia reduces acceleration/
deceleration time, resulting in higher
productivity.
• Product line:
Low-inertia SJ-DL Series 0.75 to 7.5 [kW]
 Built-in Spindle Motor
• Electricity loss is minimized by providing
better efficiency during high-speed rotation.
• Stator coil-end size has been reduced,
realizing a shorter overall motor length.
• As feedback communication is serial, the
resolution is significantly enhanced
(Max. 4 million p/rev)
• The adjustment PCB has been eliminated to
achieve adjustment-free conditions. The
standard gap has been reduced to 0.3mm.
 High-performance Spindle Motor SJ-V Series
• A vast range of spindle motors is available, including
standard, high-speed and wide-range output units,
all ready to support diversified machine tool needs.
• Product line:
Normal SJ-V Series 0.75 to 55 [kW]
Wide-range constant output
SJ-V Series 5.5 to 18.5 [kW]
High-speed SJ-V-Z Series 2.2 to 22 [kW]
Hollow-shaft SJ-VS Series 5.5 to 18.5 [kW]
 Low-inertia, High-speed Spindle Motor SJ-VL Series
• The spindle dedicated to tapping machines
requiring faster drilling and tapping.
• The low-inertia reduces acceleration/
deceleration time, resulting in higher
productivity. In addition, when driven by
a multi-hybrid drive (MDS-DM2 Series),
this motor contributes to downsizing of the
cabinet, and energy savings.
• Hollow-shaft specifications are also
available.
• Product line:
Low-inertia normal SJ-VL Series 3.0 to 11 [kW]
Low-inertia hollow shaft SJ-VLS Series 3.7 to 11 [kW]
 Tool Spindle Motor HF-KP/HF-SP Series
• Taking advantage of the characteristics of a servo
motor such as smallness and high-output, this
motor serves as a compact and high-output spindle
motor which is capable of high-speed rotation
(6,000r/min). This motor contributes to downsizing
of spindles, such as the rotary tool spindle.
• Product line:
Small capacity HF-KP Series 0.4 to 0.9 [kW]
Medium capacity HF-SP Series 2.2 to 4 [kW]
2
Drive Units
 High-performance Servo/Spindle Drive Units
MDS-D2/DH2 Series
• With the fastest current control cycle, basic performance is
drastically enhanced (high-gain control). A combination of
high-speed servo motor and high-accuracy detector helps
enhance overall drive performance.
• High-speed optical communication enables a shorter position
interpolation cycle and direct communication between drives,
promoting further high-speed and high-accuracy machining.
• A high-effi ciency fi n and low-loss power module have enabled
unit downsizing. A line of drive units driving a maximum of
two spindles is available, contributing to a reduction in control
panel size.
• STO (safe torque off) is now available. (Note)
 All-in-one compact drive units MDS-DJ Series
• Ultra-compact drive units with built-in power supplies
contribute to reducing control panel size. The 2-axis type is
added for further downsizing.
• High-speed optical communication enables a shorter position
interpolation cycle and direct communication between drives,
promoting further high-speed and high-accuracy machining.
• A high-effi ciency fi n and low-loss power module have enabled
unit downsizing, which also leads to a reduction in control
panel size.
 Multi-hybrid Drive Units
MDS-DM2 Series
• A line of high-performance multi-hybrid drive
units are available. The multi-hybrid drive unit.
• drives a maximum of three servo axes and one
spindle, supporting the ownsizing of units and
offering technical advantages.
• A power regeneration system that effi ciently uses
energy during deceleration as power contributes
to highly-frequent acceleration/deceleration and
energy savings.
(Note) Please contact us for availability of STO as a whole system.

41 4241 42
DrivesystemSystemconfiguration
3
Drive system System configuration
MDS-D2/DH2 Series
CN2 CN2
CN4
CN3CN3
CN20
CN2L
CN3L
CN2M
CN3M
CN23
CN24
L+
L-
CN41
(MDS-D/DH-PFU)
For external
emergency
stop
MDS-D2 Series:
3-phase 200VAC power supply
MDS-DH2 Series:
3-phase 400VAC power supply
From NC
Option unit
Optical
communication
cable
Brake
connector
Battery cable
Power supply
communication
cable
Power
connector
To 3rd
axis servo
Servo detector cable
Motor side detector cable
Brake connector
Power connector
Servomotor
Spindle side detector
Linear scale cable for MDS-B-HR
(Note) Prepared by user.
Spindle motor
Power cable
(Only connector is supplied.)
Optical
communication
cable
Power
connector
To brake control
To 2nd
axis servo
ABZ SIN wave signal output
Mitsubishi serial signal output
Built in cell battery
for servo drive unit
or
option battery
Option battery
Power backup unit
Power supply
unit
(MDS-D2/DH2-CV)
Spindle
drive unit
(MDS-D2/DH2-SP)
2-axis
servo drive unit
(MDS-D2/DH2-V2)
1-axis
servo drive unit
(MDS-D2/DH2-V1)
Circuit protector
(Note) Prepared
by user.
AC reactor
(D/DH-AL)
Contactor
(Note) Prepared
by user.Circuit protector or
protection fuse
Contactor control output
Cell battery built in
drive unit
(ER6V-C119B)
Battery case
(MDS-BTCASE+A6BAT)
-BTCASE+A6BAT)
Battery unit
(MDS-BTBOX-36)
Spindle detector cable
Motor side PLG cable
Spindle side detector cable
Linear scale
(for full closed loop control)
Ball screw side detector
Ball screw side detector cable
Linear scale cable (Note) Prepared by user.
MDS-B-HR unit cable
Detector conversion unit
(MDS-B-HR)
Power cable (Only connector is supplied.)
Brake cable (Only connector is supplied.)
4
MDS-DM2 Series
DOCOM
DO(ALM)
LG
+5V
LG
BT
(MDS-BTBOX-36)
CN22
CN9A
CN9B
OPT1A
CN2SP
CN3SP
CN2L
CN2M
CN2S
CN3M
CN3S
BTA
BT1
CN3L
(ER6V-C119B)
Power
connector
From NC
Optical communication
cable
Power
connector
Spindle side
detector
Spindle motor
Servomotor
Contactor
(Note) Prepared
by user.
AC reactor
(D-AL-18.5K)
Circuit protector
(Note) Prepared
by user.
3-phase 200VAC
power supply
Spindledetectorcable
Spindlesidedetectorcable
To servo for
M/S-axis
To servo for
M/S-axis
Spindledetectorcable
MotorsidePLGcable
Cell battery built in drive unit
RA circuit for contactor drive
RA circuit for motor brake
24V stabilized power supply
Brake connector
Power connector
Servodetectorcable
Motorsidedetectorcable
Brakecable
(*Onlyconnectorissupplied)
Power cable
(*Only connector
is supplied)
Linear scale
(for full closed loop control)
Linear scale cable
for M/S-axis
Battery box
Option battery
MDS-B-HR unit cable

(MDS-B-HR)
Linear scale cable for MDS-B-HR
ABZSINwavesignaloutput
Mitsubishiserialsignaloutput
Linear scale cable (Note) Prepared by user.

43 4444
DrivesystemSpecifications
43
5
MDS-DJ Series
L1
L2
L3
L11
L21
L1 L2 L3L1L2 L3
L11
L21
VU W
C
P
CN2
CN1B
CN1A
CNP1CNP2CNP3
CNP1CNP2CNP3
P
C
WVU
CN1A
CN2
CN3
L11
L21
L1L2 L3
CNP1CNP2
WVU
WVU
CN1A
L11
L21
L1 L2 L3
CNP1CNP2
WVU
WVU
CN1A
BAT
CN1B
CN1B
CN3
(MDS-DJ-V2)
CNP3LCNP3M
CN2L
CN2M
BAT
(MDS-DJ-SP) (MDS-DJ-SP2)
CNP3MCNP3L
CN2L
CN2M
Servo motor Spindle motor
Contactor
(Note)
Prepared by user
From NC
Circuit protector
(Note)
Prepared by user
Circuit
protector
or
fuse
(Note)
Prepared
by user
Servo
drive unit
Option
Regene-
rative
resistor
Contactor
(Note)
Prepared by user
Circuit protector
(Note)
Prepared by user
Spindle
drive unit
3-phase
200 to 230VAC
Regene-
rative
resistor
Circuit
protector
or
fuse
(Note)
Prepared
by user
Contactor
(Note)
Prepared by user
Circuit protector
(Note)
Prepared by user
(Note)
Prepared
by user
Regene-
rative
resistor
Circuit
protector
or
fuse
Option
Contactor
(Note)
Prepared by user
(Note)
Prepared
by user
Regene-
rative
resistor
Circuit
protector
or
fuse
Spindle
drive unit
Servo
drive unit
Linear scale
Mitsubishi serial signal output
ABZ SIN wave signal output
Linear scale cable
for MDS-B-HR
(MDS-B-HR)
MDS-B-HR unit cable
To 2nd
axis servo
To 3rd
axis servo
(MDS-DJ-V1)
To servo detector
(Note) As for 2-axis drive unit, machine side
detector connection is not available.
Circuit protector
(Note)
Prepared by user
To 5th
axis spindle
To 6th
axis spindle
(Note) As for 2-axis drive unit, machine side
detector connection is not available.
To spindle detector
Drive system System configuration
6
Drive system Specifications
Servo specification
Function name MDS-D2-V1/V2/V3 MDS-DH2-V1/V2
MDS-DM2
-SPV2/3, SPHV3
MDS-DJ-V1 MDS-DJ-V2
Software Version A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
1 Base control functions
1.1 Full closed loop control     –
1.2 Position command synchronous control     
1.3 Speed command synchronous control  (Note 2)  – – –
1.4 Distance-coded reference position control     –
2 Servo control function
2.1 Torque limit function (stopper function)     
2.2 Variable speed loop gain control     
2.3 Gain changeover for synchronous tapping control     
2.4 Speed loop PID changeover control     
2.5 Disturbance torque observer     
2.6 Smooth High Gain control (SHG control)     
2.7 High-speed synchronous tapping control (OMR-DD control)     
2.8 Dual feedback control     –
2.9 HAS control     
2.10 OMR-FF control     
3 Compensation control
function
3.1 Jitter compensation     
3.2 Notch filter
Variable frequency: 4
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
3.3 Adaptive tracking-type notch filter     
3.4 Overshooting compensation     
3.5 Machine end compensation control     
3.6 Lost motion compensation type 2     
4 Protection function
4.1 Deceleration control at emergency stop     
4.2 Vertical axis drop prevention/pull-up control     
4.3 Earth fault detection     
4.4 Collision detection function     
4.5 SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function     
4.6 Fan stop detection     
4.9 STO (Safe Torque Off) function     
5 Sequence function
5.2 Motor brake control function (Note 1)     
5.4 Specified speed output    – –
5.5 Quick READY ON sequence    – –
6 Diagnosis function
6.1 Monitor output function     
6.2 Machine resonance frequency display function     
6.3 Machine inertia display function     
(Note 1) For the multiaxis drive unit, a control by each axis is not available.
It is required to turn the servo of all axes OFF in the drive unit in order to enable a motor brake output.
(Note 2) Always set L-axis as primary axis and M-axis as secondary axis for the speed command synchronous control using MDS-D2-V3.
Other settings cause the initial parameter error alarm.
Spindle specification
Function name MDS-D2-SP MDS-DH2-SP MDS-D2-SP2
MDS-DM2
-SPV2/3, SPHV3
MDS-DJ-SP MDS-DJ-SP2
Software Version A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
1.1 Full closed loop control      –
1.5 Spindle’s continuous position loop control      
1.6 Coil changeover control   –  – –
1.7 Gear changeover control      
1.8 Orientation control      
1.9 Indexing control      
1.10 Synchronous tapping control      
1.11 Spindle synchronous control      
1.12 Spindle/C axis control      
1.13 Proximity switch orientation control   –   –
2 Spindle control
functions
2.1 Torque limit function      
2.2 Variable speed loop gain control      
2.5 Disturbance torque observer      
2.6 Smooth High Gain control (SHG control)      
2.7 High-speed synchronous tapping control (OMR-DD control)      
2.8 Dual feedback control      –
2.11 Control loop gain changeover      
2.12 Spindle output stabilizing control      
2.13 High-response spindle acceleration/deceleration function      
3 Compensation control
function
3.1 Jitter compensation      
3.2 Notch filter
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
Fixed frequency: 1
3.3 Adaptive tracking-type notch filter      
3.4 Overshooting compensation      
3.6 Lost motion compensation type 2      
3.9 Spindle motor temperature compensation function      
4.1 Deceleration control at emergency stop      
4.3 Earth fault detection      
4.5 SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function      
4.6 Fan stop detection      
4.9 STO (Safe Torque Off) function      
5 Sequence function
5.4 Specified speed output     – –
5.5 Quick READY ON sequence     – –
6 Diagnosis function
6.1 Monitor output function      
6.2 Machine resonance frequency display function      
6.3 Machine inertia display function      
6.4 Motor temperature display function      
6.5 Load monitor output function      
6.6 Open loop control function      
Servo / Spindle specifications

45 4646
DrivesystemType
45
DrivesystemSpecifications
7
Drive system Specifications
Power Supply specification
Power Supply specification
Function name MDS-D2-CV MDS-DH2-CV
MDS-DM2-
SPV2/3,SPHV3
built-in converter
MDS-DJ-V1/V2
built-in converter
MDS-DJ-SP/SP2
built-in converter
Software Version A3 A3 A1 A5 A4
1.14 Power regeneration control    – –
1.15 Resistor regeneration control – – –  
4.6 Fan stop detection     
4.7 Open-phase detection    – –
4.8 Contactor weld detection     
4.10 Deceleration and stop function at power
failure (Note)
  – – –
5 Sequence function
5.1 Contactor control function     
5.3 External emergency stop function     
5.5 High-speed ready ON sequence    – –
6 Diagnosis function 6.7 Power supply diagnosis display function    – –
(Note) The power backup unit and resistor unit option are required.
MITSUBISHI CNC DRIVE SYSTEM LINES
Drive unit to realize complete nano control MDS-DH2 Series (400V)
MDS-D2 Series (200V)
Multi-hybrid drive unit MDS-DM2 Series (servo+spindle)
Compact drive unit MDS-DJ Series
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 10 20 30 50 100 (kW)
Compatible motors’ rated capacity
SERVO
0.1kW 3.5kW
SPINDLE
2.2kW 11kW
SPINDLE
5.5kW 15kW
SERVO
0.5kW 4.5kW
SPINDLE
2.2kW 55kW
SERVO
0.5kW 15kW
SPINDLE
0.75kW 55kW
SERVO
0.2kW 11kW
8
Drive system Type
HF Series
HF q w e – r
qRated output and maximum rotation speed
Symbol Rated output Max. rotation speed Flange size (mm)
75 0.75 kW 5000 r/min 90 SQ.
105 1.0 kW 5000 r/min 90 SQ.
54 0.5 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ.
104 1.0 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ.
154 1.5 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ.
224 2.2 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ.
204 2.0 kW 4000 r/min 176 SQ.
354 3.5 kW 4000 r/min 176 SQ.
123 1.2 kW 3000 r/min 130 SQ.
223 2.2 kW 3000 r/min 130 SQ.
303 3.0 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
453 4.5 kW 3500 r/min 176 SQ.
703 7.0 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
903 9.0 kW 3000 r/min 204 SQ.
142 1.4 kW 2000 r/min 130 SQ.
302 3.0 kW 2000 r/min 176 SQ.
wMagnetic brake eShaft end structure
Symbol Magnetic brake Symbol Shaft end structure
None None S Straight
B With magnetic brake T Taper
(Note) “Taper” is available for
the motor whose flange
size is 90 SQ. mm or
130 SQ. mm.
rDetector
Symbol Detection method Detector resolution
A48
Absolute
position
260,000 p/rev
A51 1,000,000 p/rev
A74/A74N 16,000,000 p/rev
* A74 falls under the Export Trade Control Ordinance and Foreign Trade Ordinance.
HF-KP Series
HF-KP13 w J-S17
Rated output Max. rotation speed Flange size (mm)
0.1 kW 6000 r/min 40 SQ.
* The motor-end detector has absolute position specifications,
but is not equipped with the capacitor for data backup.
Thus, absolute position is lost immediately after disconnection
of the detector cable.
HF-KP q w JW04-S6
qRated output and maximum rotation speed
Symbol Rated output Max. rotation speed Flange size (mm)
23 0.2 kW 6000 r/min 60 SQ.
43 0.4 kW 6000 r/min 60 SQ.
73 0.75 kW 6000 r/min 80 SQ.
wMagnetic brake
Symbol Magnetic brake
None None
B With magnetic brake
eDetector
Symbol Detection method Detector resolution
None
Absolute
position
260,000 p/rev
(Note) The detector for HF-KP Series is fixed.
200V HF servo motor
LM-F Series
Primary side [coil side] LM-FP q w – e M-1WW0 Secondary side [magnet side] LM-FS q 0- w -1WW0
qWidth wLength eRated thrust qWidth wLength
Symbol Width (nominal) Symbol Length (nominal) Symbol Rated thrust Symbol Width (nominal) Symbol Length (nominal)
2 120 mm B 290 mm 06 600 N 2 120 mm 480 480 mm
4 200 mm D 530 mm 12 1200 N 4 200 mm 576 576 mm
5 240 mm F 770 mm 18 1800 N 5 240 mm
H 1010 mm 24 2400 N
36 3600 N
48 4800 N
60 6000 N
200V Linear servo motor
200V Direct-drive motor
TM-RB Series
Primary side [coil side]
TM-RBP q w e
Secondary side [magnet side]
TM-RBS q w e
qRated torque wStator dimensions eRated rotation speed
Symbol Rated torque Symbol Dimension Symbol Speed
012 12 N · m C DIA 130 mm 10 100 r/min
036 36 N · m E DIA 180 mm 20 200 r/min
048 48 N · m G DIA 230 mm
105 105 N · m J DIA 330 mm
150 150 N · m
340 340 N · m
500 500 N · m

47 4847 48
DrivesystemType
DrivesystemType
9
Drive system Type
SJ-V/VL Series SJ- q w e r – t y T
qMotor Series rShort-time rated output (Normal specification) tSpecification code
Symbol Motor Series Symbol Short-time rated output The SJ-V/VLSeries is
indicated with a specification
code (01 to 99).
V Medium inertia Series 0.75 0.75 kW
VL Low inertia Series 1.5 1.5 kW
2.2 2.2 kW
wCoil changeover 3.7 3.7 kW ySpecial specifications
Symbol Coil changeover 5.5 5.5 kW Symbol Special specifications
None Unavailable 7.5 7.5 kW None Standard
K Available 11 11 kW Z High-speed bearing
15 15 kW
FZ
High-speed bearing
front-lockeShaft configuration 18.5 18.5 kW
Symbol Shaft configuration 22 22 kW
None Standard 26 26 kW
S Hollow shaft 37 37 kW
45 45 kW
55 55 kW
200V SJ-V spindle motor
SJ-D Series (for 200V) SJ-D q w / e – r t – y
qMotor Series wShort-time (or %ED) rated output eMaximum rotation speed tDetector yOption (Note)
Symbol Motor Series Symbol Short-time rated output Indicates the hundreds place
and higher order digits.
Symbol Type Symbol Option
None Normal specifications 0.75 0.75 kW None Type 1
None
Standard (flange type, without oil seal, without key,
coil changeover unavailable, air-cooling, solid shaft)
J
Compact lightweight
specifications
1.5 1.5 kW T Type 2
3.7 3.7 kW rSpecification code C With key
L
Low-inertia
specifications
5.5 5.5 kW Indicates a specification
code (01 to 99).
J Oil seal
7.5 7.5 kW S Hollow shaft
11 11 kW X Reversed cooling air
15 15 kW (Note) If more than one option is included,
the symbols are in alphabetical order.
200V SJ-D spindle motor
SJ-B Series SJ- q B w e r t y
qVoltage eMotor size rSpecification code
Symbol Voltage Symbol Stator outline Specification code (01 to 99)
2 200V 0 f 110
4 400V 1 f 128 tOverheat protection sensor
* 400V is available by special order. 2 f 160 Symbol Overheat protection sensor
3 f 180 T Thermistor
wNumber of poles 4 f 210
Symbol Number of poles 5 f 230 yCoil changeover
2 2 poles 6 f 255 Symbol Coil changeover
4 4 poles 7 f 300 None Unavailable
6 6 poles 9 f 370 D Available (∆-2//∆)
A f 90 K Available ( -∆)
B f 115
Stator outline (frame No.) is
indicated with 0 to 9, A, B.
SJ-PMB Series SJ- q PMB w e r – t
qVoltage wContinuous rated torque rOverheat protection sensor
Symbol Voltage Indicates with 3 digits.
For 1000 [N · m] or more (for 9999 [N · m] or less), the upper digit is indicated
by alphabetic character and the others are indicated by the carried number.
Example) 020 : 20 [N · m] A55 : 1550 [N · m]
Symbol Overheat protection sensor
None 200V T Thermistor
4 400V
* 400V is available by special order.
eBase rotation speed tDesign management No.
Indicates the thousands and the hundreds places (the ten places are rounded off.)
Example) 03 : 250 to 349 [r/min] 15 : 1450 to 1549 [r/min]
Indicates with 2 digits number or alphabetic characters
Example) 00, A1
200V Built-in spindle motor
(Note) This explains the model name system of a spindle motor, and all combinations of motor types listed above do not exist.
10
HF-KP Series
HF-KP q J w W09
qRated output · Maximum rotation speed
Symbol Rated output Maximum rotation speed Flange size (mm)
46 0.4 kW 6000 r/min 60 SQ.
56 0.5 kW 6000 r/min 60 SQ.
96 0.9 kW 6000 r/min 80 SQ.
wOption
Symbol Option
None Without keyway
K With keyway (with key)
HF-SP Series
HF-SP q J w W09
qRated output · Maximum rotation speed
Symbol Rated output Maximum rotation speed Flange size (mm)
226 2.2 kW 6000 r/min 130 SQ.
406 4.0 kW 6000 r/min 130 SQ.
wOption
Symbol Option
None Without keyway
K With keyway (without key)
HF Series
HF q w – e
qRated output · Maximum rotation speed wShaft end structure
Symbol Rated output Maximum rotation speed Flange size (mm) Symbol Shaft end structure
75 0.75 kW 4000 r/min 90 SQ. S Straight
105 1.0 kW 4000 r/min 90 SQ.
54 0.5 kW 3000 r/min 130 SQ. eDetector
104 1.0 kW 3000 r/min 130 SQ. Symbol Resolution
154 1.5 kW 3000 r/min 130 SQ. A48 260,000 p/rev
224 2.2 kW 3000 r/min 130 SQ. (Note) Detector A51 and A74N can
not be used with the tool
spindle motor.
204 2.0 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
354 3.5 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
123 1.2 kW 2000 r/min 130 SQ.
223 2.2 kW 2000 r/min 130 SQ.
303 3.0 kW 2000 r/min 176 SQ.
453 4.5 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
703 7.0 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
903 9.0 kW 3000 r/min 204 SQ.
200V Tool spindle motor

49 5050
DrivesystemServomotor200VHFSeries
49
DrivesystemType
11
Drive system Type
HF-H Series
HF-H q w e – r
qRated output · Maximum rotation speed wMagnetic brakes rDetector
Symbol Rated output Maximum rotation speed Flange size (mm) Symbol Magnetic brakes Symbol Detector Resolution
75 0.75 kW 5000 r/min 90 SQ. None None A48
Absolute
position
260,000 p/rev
105 1.0 kW 5000 r/min 90 SQ. B With magnetic brakes A51 1,000,000 p/rev
54 0.5 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ. A74N 16,000,000 p/rev
104 1.0 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ. eShaft end structure
154 1.5 kW 4000 r/min 130 SQ. Symbol Shaft end structure
204 2.0 kW 4000 r/min 176 SQ. S Straight
354 3.5 kW 4000 r/min 176 SQ. T Taper
453 4.5 kW 3500 r/min 176 SQ. (Note) “Taper” is available for
the motor whose flange
size is 90 SQ. mm or
130 SQ. mm.
703 7.0 kW 3000 r/min 176 SQ.
903 9.0 kW 3000 r/min 204 SQ.
SJ-V Series
SJ-4- q w e r – t y T
qMotor Series wCoil changeover rShort time rated output tSpecification code
Symbol Motor Series Symbol Coil changeover (Normal specification) The SJ-4-V Series is indicated with a
specification code (01 to 99).
V Medium-inertia Series None Unavailable Symbol Short time rated output
2.2 2.2 kW
eShaft configuration 3.7 3.7 kW ySpecial specification
Symbol Axis configuration 5.5 5.5 kW Symbol Special specification
None Standard 7.5 7.5 kW None Standard
S Hollow shaft 11 11 kW Z High-speed bearing
15 15 kW
18.5 18.5 kW
22 22 kW
26 26 kW
37 37 kW
45 45 kW
55 55 kW
400V HF-H servo motor
400V SJ-4-V spindle motor
(Note 1) The built-in spindle motor is available by special order.
(Note 2) This explains the model name system of a spindle motor, and all combinations of motor types listed above do not exist.
12
Drive system Servo motor 200V HF Series
Motor type HF-KP13J-S17 HF-KP23JW04-S6 HF-KP43JW04-S6 HF-KP73JW04-S6 HF75 HF105
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- − 20 20 20 20 20
2-axis type MDS-D2-V2- −
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
3-axis type MDS-D2-V3- − 202020 202020 202020
202020
404040
202020
404040
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − − − − −
SPV3- − − − − − −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-
V1- 10 10 15 30 30 30
V2- − − − 3030 3030 3030
Output
Stall torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 15
10
5
0
0.950.32 1.90.64
3.8
1.3
7.2
2.4
8.0
2.0
11.0
3.0
Rated output [kW] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.0
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 6000 6000 6000 6000 5000 5000
Motor inertia [kg · cm2
] 0.088 0.23 0.42 1.43 2.6 5.1
Motor inertia with a brake [kg · cm2
] 0.090 0.31 0.50 1.63 2.8 5.3
Degree of protection (The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP67 IP67
Outline dimension drawing [mm]
(Without a brake, Straight shaft, A48 detector)
(Note) The total length will be 3.5mm longer
when using an A51 or A74/A74N detector.
(Note) The detector specification for the HF-KP
series is fixed.
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 30 f 50 f 50 f 70 f 80 f 80
Shaft diameter [mm] f 8 f 14 f 14 f 19 f 14 f 14
Mass (with a brake) [kg] 0.66 (0.96) 1.2 (1.8) 1.7 (2.3) 2.9 (4.1) 2.5 (3.9) 4.3 (5.7)
Absolute position
detector
compatible
drive unit
16,000,000 [p/rev] (A74/A74N) − − − − D2 D2
1,000,000 [p/rev] (A51) − − − −
D2, DJ D2, DJ
260,000 [p/rev] (A48) DJ D2, DJ D2, DJ D2, DJ
Motor type HF54 HF104 HF154 HF224 HF204
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 40 40 − 80 80 − 80
2-axis type MDS-D2-V2-
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
3-axis type MDS-D2-V3- 404040 404040 404040 − − − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- xxx80* xxx80* − xxx80* xxx80* − xxx80*
SPV3- xxx80* xxx80* −
xxx80*
200120
xxx80*
200120
−
xxx80*
200120
SPHV3- 20080 20080 − 20080 20080 − 20080
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-
V1- 30 40 − 80 80 80 −
V2- 3030 − − − − − −
Output
Stall torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 50
40
30
20
10
0
2.9
13.0
5.9
23.3
7.0
23.7
9.0
42.0
12.0
46.5
13.7
42.0
13.7
47.0
Rated output [kW] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.2 2.0
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
] 6.1 11.9 17.8 23.7 38.3
] 8.3 14.1 20.0 25.9 48.0
Degree of protection (The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 110 f 110 f 110 f 110 f 114.3
Shaft diameter [mm] f 24 f 24 f 24 f 24 f 35
Mass (with a brake) [kg] 4.8 (6.8) 6.5 (8.5) 8.3 (10.3) 10.0 (12.0) 12.0 (18.0)
Absolute position
detector
compatible
drive unit
16,000,000 [p/rev] (A74/A74N) D2 D2
D2-V3
D2 D2 − D2
1,000,000 [p/rev] (A51) D2
DM2, DJ
D2
DM2, DJ
D2
DM2, DJ
D2
DM2, DJ
DJ
D2
DM2260,000 [p/rev] (A48)
*Refer to “MDS-DM2 Series Multi-hybrid drive” in this book for compatible drive unit type.
(Note) Only the combination designated in this manual can be used for the motor and drive unit. Always use the designated combination.
HF Series

51 5252
DrivesystemServomotor200VTM-RBSeries
51
DrivesystemServomotor200VHFSeries
13
Drive system Servo motor 200V HF Series
Motor type HF354 HF123 HF223 HF303
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- − − 160 20 − 40 80
2-axis type MDS-D2-V2- − −
16080 (L)
160160
160160W
2020 (L, M)
4020 (M)
−
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
3-axis type MDS-D2-V3- − − −
202020
404040
404040 (M, S) 404040 (L) −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − − − − xxx80* xxx80*
SPV3- − 200120 − − − xxx80*
xxx80*
200120
SPHV3- − − − − − 20080 20080
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-V1- 100 − − 40 − 40 80
Output
Stall torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 100
80
60
40
20
0
22.5
65.0
22.5
75.0
22.5
90.0
17.0
7.0 10.0
32.0
12.0
32.0
22.5
64.0
Rated output [kW] 3.5 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.0
] 75.0 11.9 23.7 75.0
] 84.7 14.1 25.9 84.7
Degree of protection (The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 114.3 f 110 f 110 f 114.3
Shaft diameter [mm] f 35 f 24 f 24 f 35
Mass (with a brake) [kg] 19.0 (25.0) 6.5 (8.5) 10.0 (12.0) 19.0 (25.0)
Absolute position
detector
compatible
drive unit
16,000,000 [p/rev] (A74/A74N) − −
D2
D2 − D2 D2
1,000,000 [p/rev] (A51)
DJ DM2 D2, DJ D2-V3
D2
DM2, DJ
D2
DM2, DJ260,000 [p/rev] (A48)
Motor type HF453 HF703 HF903 HF142 HF302
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- − 160 160W 320 20 − 40
2-axis type MDS-D2-V2- −
16080 (L)
160160
160160W
160160W −
2020
4020 (M)
−
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
3-axis type MDS-D2-V3- − − − −
202020
404040
404040 (M, S) 404040 (L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − − − − − xxx80*
SPV3- 200120 − − − − − xxx80*
SPHV3- − − − − − − 20080
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-V1- − − − − 40 − 40
Output
Stall torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 200
150
100
50
0
37.2
90.0
37.2
122.0
49.0
152.0
58.8
208.0
11.0
26.5 15.6
50.0
20.0
50.0
Rated output [kW] 4.5 7.0 9.0 1.4 2.2 3.0
] 112.0 154.0 196.0 17.8 75.0
] 121.7 163.7 205.7 20.0 84.7
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 114.3 f 114.3 f 180 f 110 f 114.3
Absolute position
detector
compatible
drive unit
16,000,000 [p/rev] (A74/A74N) −
D2 D2 D2
D2
D2-V3
D2
1,000,000 [p/rev] (A51)
DM2 D2, DJ D2, DM2, DJ
260,000 [p/rev] (A48)
*Refer to “MDS-DM2 Series Multi-hybrid drive” in this book for compatible drive unit type.
HF Series
14
Drive system Servo motor 200V TM-RB Series
TM-RB Series
Direct-drive
motor type
Primary side type TM-RBP012C20 TM-RBP036E20 TM-RBP048G20 TM-RBP105G10
Secondary side type TM-RBS012C20 TM-RBS036E20 TM-RBS048G20 TM-RBS105G10
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 40 80 80 160
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
16080 (L)
160160
3-axis type MDS-D2-V3- 404040 − − −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-V1- 40 80 80 100
Output
Rated torque (liquid-cooling)
Max. torque
[N · m] 300
250
200
150
100
50
0
12
36 36
108
48
144
105
260
Rated output [W] 252 754 1005 1100
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 500 500 500 250
] 22 127 280 395
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
DIA 56
76
DIA 130
DIA 100
91
DIA 180
DIA 130
80
DIA 230
DIA 130
105
DIA 230
Mass [kg]
Primary side (coil) 3.9 7.1 10 13
Secondary side (magnet) 1.7 3.7 5 7
Direct-drive
motor type
Primary side type TM-RBP105G20 TM-RBP150G20 TM-RBP340J20 TM-RBP500J20
Secondary side type TM-RBS105G20 TM-RBS150G20 TM-RBS340J20 TM-RBS500J20
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 160 160 320 320W
16080 (L)
160160
160160 − −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-V1- − − − −
Output
Rated torque (liquid-cooling)
Max. torque
[N · m] 1400
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0
105
260
150
375 340
850
500
1280
Rated output [W] 2199 3141 7120 10471
] 395 510 2778 3538
DIA 130
105
DIA 230
DIA 130
130
DIA 230 DIA 205
154
DIA 330
DIA 205
191
DIA 330
Mass [kg]
Primary side (coil) 13 16 33 41
Secondary side (magnet) 7 9 20 26
(Note 1) The detector should be procured by the user.
(Note 2) Only the combination designated in this manual can be used for the motor and drive unit. Always use the designated combination.

53 5453 54
DrivesystemServomotor200VLM-FSeries
DrivesystemServomotor200VLM-FSeries
15
Drive system Servo motor 200V LM-F Series
Linear servo
motor type
Primary side type LM-FP2B-06M-1WW0 LM-FP2D-12M-1WW0 LM-FP2F-18M-1WW0 LM-FP4B-12M-1WW0
Secondary side type LM-FS20--1WW0 LM-FS20--1WW0 LM-FS20--1WW0 LM-FS40--1WW0
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 40 80 160 80
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
16080 (L)
160160
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
3-axis type MDS-D2-V3- 404040 − − −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-V1- 40 80 − 80
Thrust force
Continuous (natural-cooling)
Continuous (liquid-cooling)
Maximum
[N] 6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
300 600
1800
600
1200
3600
5400
900
1800
600
1200
3600
Rated thrust force [N] 600 1200 1800 1200
Maximum speed (Note 1) [m/s] 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Magnetic attraction force [N] 4500 9000 13500 9000
Primary side Secondary side
120
50
1000
290
19.5
120
480
576
50
1000
530
120
19.5
120
480
576
120
50
1000
770
120
19.5
480
576
1000
50
200
290
19.5
200
480
576
Mass [kg]
Secondary side (magnet)
7.1 (480mm)
9.0 (576mm)
7.1 (480mm)
9.0 (576mm)
7.1 (480mm)
9.0 (576mm)
13.5 (480mm)
16.0 (576mm)
Linear servo
motor type
Primary side type LM-FP4D-24M-1WW0 LM-FP4F-36M-1WW0 LM-FP4H-48M-1WW0 LM-FP5H-60M-1WW0
Secondary side type LM-FS40--1WW0 LM-FS40--1WW0 LM-FS40--1WW0 LM-FS50--1WW0
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 160 320 320 200 (Note 2)
16080 (L)
160160
− − −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-V1- − − − −
Thrust force
Maximum
[N] 20000
15000
10000
5000
0
1200 2400
7200
1800
3600
10800
2400
4800
14400
3000
6000
18000
Rated thrust force [N] 2400 3600 4800 6000
Maximum speed (Note 1) [m/s] 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Magnetic attraction force [N] 18000 27000 36000 45000
1000
50
530
480
576
19.5
200200
1000
50
200
770
480
576
19.5
200
1000
50
200
1010
480
576
19.5
200
1010
1000
240
50 25
240
480
576
Mass [kg]
13.5 (480mm)
16.0 (576mm)
13.5 (480mm)
16.0 (576mm)
13.5 (480mm)
16.0 (576mm)
20.0 (480mm)
26.0 (576mm)
(Note 1) The maximum speed in actual use is either the linear scale’s maximum speed or this specified value, whichever is smaller.
(Note 2) 400V specifications
LM-F Series
16
Linear servo
motor type
Primary side type LM-FP2B-06M-1WW0 LM-FP2D-12M-1WW0 LM-FP2F-18M-1WW0
Secondary side type LM-FS20--1WW0 LM-FS20--1WW0 LM-FS20--1WW0
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 80 160 320
8040 (L)
8080
16080 (M)
16080 (L)
160160
−
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-V1- 80 − −
Thrust force
Maximum
[N] 12000
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
600
1200
3600
1200
2400
7200
10800
1800
3600
Rated thrust force [N] 1200 2400 3600
Maximum speed (Note 1) [m/s] 2.0 2.0 2.0
Magnetic attraction force (per motor) [N] 4500 9000 13500
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
120
50
1000
290
19.5
120
480
576
19.5
120
50
1000
530
120
480
576
120
19.5
120
50
1000
770
480
576
Mass [kg]
Primary side (coil) 9×2 18×2 27×2
7.1 (480mm)
9.0 (576mm)
7.1 (480mm)
9.0 (576mm)
7.1 (480mm)
9.0 (576mm)
Linear servo
motor type
Primary side type LM-FP4B-12M-1WW0 LM-FP4D-24M-1WW0
Secondary side type LM-FS40--1WW0 LM-FS40--1WW0
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-V1- 160 320
2-axis type MDS-D2-V2- 160160 −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-V1- − −
Thrust force
Maximum
[N] 16000
14000
12000
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
1200
2400
7200
2400
4800
14400
Rated thrust force [N] 2400 4800
Maximum speed (Note 1) [m/s] 2.0 2.0
Magnetic attraction force (per motor) [N] 9000 18000
Degree of protection IP00 IP00
Degree of protection [mm]
19.5
200
1000
50
200
480
576
290
1000
50
480
576
200
19.5
200
530
Mass [kg]
Primary side (coil) 14×2 28×2
13.5 (480mm)
16.0 (576mm)
13.5 (480mm)
16.0 (576mm)
(Note 1) The maximum speed in actual use is either the linear scale’s maximum speed or this specified value, whichever is smaller.
LM-F Series (One unit and two motor)

55 5655 56
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-DSeries
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-DSeries
17
Drive system Spindle motor 200V SJ-D Series
SJ-D Series (Normal specifications)
Motor type SJ-D3.7/100-01 SJ-D5.5/100-01 SJ-D5.5/120-01 SJ-D7.5/100-01 SJ-D7.5/120-01
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 80 80 80 160 160
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2-
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
8040 (L)
8080 (L, M)
16080S (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
16080S (L) 16080S (L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − 10080 10080 10080 10080
SPV3- − 10080 10080 10080 10080
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- 80 100 100 120 120
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
r/min
2
0
1500 6000 10000
4
kW
6
Short-time rating (15min)
2.2
3.7
r/min
2
0
1500 6000 10000
4 3.7
5.5kW
6
r/min
2
0
1500 6000 12000
4
5.5kW
6
3.7
4
2
0
6
kW
8
1500 6000 10000
r/min
5.5
7.5
4
2
0
6
kW
8
r/min
5.5
7.5
1500 6000 12000
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 4.44 6.6 6.6 9 9
Base rotation speed [r/min] 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
Max. rotation speed in constant output range [r/min] 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 14.0 23.6 23.6 35.0 35.0
Motor inertia [kg · m2
] 0.0074 0.013 0.013 0.023 0.023
Outline dimension drawing (flange type) [mm]
327
174 SQ.
417
174 SQ.
417
174 SQ.
439
204 SQ.
439
204 SQ.
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 150 f 150 f 150 f 180 f 180
Mass [kg] 26 39 39 53 53
Motor type SJ-D11/100-01 SJ-D5.5/120-02
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 160 − 160 200
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S (L) − 16080S (L) −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- 16080 10080 16080 20080
SPV3- 16080 10080 16080 20080
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- 160 − − −
Output
Acceleration/Deceleration
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating (10min) (15min)
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
10
5
0
kW
15
45001500 10000
r/min
7.5
11
4
2
0
6
kW
8
28002000 8000 12000
r/min
%ED rating (25%ED)
5.5
3.7
7.5
10
5
0
kW
15
5.5
3.7
9.2
28002000 80006000 12000
r/min
%ED rating (25%ED)
10
5
0
kW
15
2800
1700 4500 8000 12000
r/min
5.5
3.7
10.4
%ED rating (25%ED)
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11 7.5 9.2 10.4
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 13.2 9 11.04 12.48
Base rotation speed [r/min] 1500 2800
Max. rotation speed in constant output range [r/min] 4500 8000
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 10000 12000
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 47.7 12.6
] 0.031 0.0074
Degree of protection(The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP54 IP54
489
204 SQ.
327
174 SQ.
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 180 f 150
Shaft diameter [mm] f 48 f 28
Mass [kg] 64 26
(Note 2) Actual acceleration/deceleration output is 1.2-fold of Standard output during acceleration/deceleration or Short time rated output.
18
SJ-D Series (Hollow shaft specifications)
Motor type SJ-D5.5/120-02T-S
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- − 160 200
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- − 16080S(L) −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- 10080 16080 20080
SPV3- 10080 16080 20080
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- − − −
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
4
2
0
6
kW
8
28002000 8000 12000
r/min
%ED rating (25%ED)
5.5
3.7
7.5
10
5
0
kW
15
5.5
3.7
9.2
28002000 80006000 12000
r/min
%ED rating (25%ED)
10
5
0
kW
15
2800
1700 4500 8000 12000
r/min
5.5
3.7
10.4
%ED rating (25%ED)
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 7.5 9.2 10.4
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 9 11.04 12.48
Base rotation speed [r/min] 2800
Max. rotation speed in constant output range [r/min] 8000
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 12000
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 12.6
] 0.0075
Degree of protection(The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP54
327
174 SQ.
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f150
Shaft diameter [mm] f28
Mass [kg] 24

57 5858
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-DLSeries
57
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-DJSeries
19
Drive system Spindle motor 200V SJ-DJ Series
SJ-DJ Series (Compact lightweight specifications)
Motor type SJ-DJ5.5/100-01 SJ-DJ5.5/120-01 SJ-DJ7.5/100-01
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 80 80 160
8040 (L)
8080 (L, M)
16080S (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
16080S (L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- 10080 10080 10080
SPV3- 10080 10080 10080
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- 100 100 120
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
r/min
2
0
1500 2000 4500 10000
kW
4
6
8
5.5
3.7
%ED rating (25%ED)
r/min
2
0
1500
2000
4500 12000
4
5.5
kW
6
3.7
%ED rating (25%ED)
r/min
2
0
1500 2000 4500 10000
kW
4
6
8
5.5
7.5
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 5.5 5.5 7.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 6.6 6.6 9
Base rotation speed
Short-time [r/min] 1500 1500 1500
Continuous [r/min] 2000 2000 2000
Max. rotation speed in constant output range [r/min] 4500 4500 4500
Maximum rotation speed [r/min] 10000 12000 10000
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 17.7 17.7 26.3
] 0.0074 0.0074 0.013
Degree of protection(The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP54 IP54 IP54
174 SQ.
327
174 SQ.
327
174 SQ.
417
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 150 f 150 f 150
Shaft diameter [mm] f 28 f 28 f 28
Mass [kg] 26 26 39
Motor type SJ-DJ7.5/120-01 SJ-DJ11/100-01 SJ-DJ15/80-01
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S(L) 16080S (L) −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- 10080 16080 20080
SPV3- 10080 16080 20080
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- 120 160 −
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
1500 12000
5.5
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
7.5
45002000
kW
r/min r/min
4
0
1500 2000 4500 10000
kW
8
12
16
7.5
11
0
r/min
4
1500 2000 4000 8000
kW
8
12
16
%ED rating (15%ED)
11
15
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 7.5 11 15
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 9 13.2 18
Base rotation speed
Short-time [r/min] 1500 1500 1500
Continuous [r/min] 2000 2000 2000
] 0.013 0.023 0.031
174 SQ.
417
204 SQ.
439 489
204 SQ.
Mass [kg] 39 53 64
(Note 3) %ED is a load time ratio of operating time relative to a 10-minute cycle time. At 25%ED, for example, the operating time is 2.5 minutes and non-operation time is 7.5 minutes of a 10-minute cycle time.
20
Drive system Spindle motor 200V SJ-DL Series
Motor type SJ-DL0.75/100-01 SJ-DL1.5/100-01 SJ-DL5.5/150-01T
Compatible
drive unit
2020
4020 (M)
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
16080S (L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − 16080
SPV3- − − 16080
SPHV3- − − −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- − − −
Output
Short-time rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Continuous rating
1.0
0.5
0
kW
1.5
1500 1800 10000
r/min
0.75
0.4
0.9
1.0
0.5
0
kW
1.5
2.0
1500 10000
ｒ/min
1.5
0.75
ｒ/min
0
2500 3000 4200 15000
kW
5
10
15
5.5
11
3.7
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 0.9 1.5 11
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 1.08 1.8 13.2
Base rotation speed [r/min] 1500 1500 2500
] 0.011 0.019 0.0046
130 SQ.
264 317
130 SQ.
377
174 SQ.
Mass [kg] 10 14 30
Motor type SJ-DL5.5/200-01T SJ-DL7.5/150-01T
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 160 160
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S (L) 16080S (L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − 16080
SPV3- − 16080
SPHV3- − −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- − −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
r/min
0
2500 3000 4200
15000 20000
kW
5
10
15
5.5
11
3.7
10
5
0
kW
15
15001800 8000 15000
r/min
5.5
7.5
11
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11 11
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 13.2 13.2
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 14.1 35.0
] 0.0046 0.016
Degree of protection(The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP54 IP54
174 SQ.
377
489
204 SQ.
Mass [kg] 30 56
SJ-DL Series (Low-inertia specification)

59 6060
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-VSeries
59
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-DLSeries
21
Motor type SJ-DL5.5/200-01T-S
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 160
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S(L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- −
SPV3- −
SPHV3- −
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
r/min
0
2500 3000 4200
15000 20000
kW
5
10
15
5.5
11
3.7
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 13.2
] 0.0046
Degree of protection(The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP54
174 SQ.
377
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 150
Shaft diameter [mm] f 22
Mass [kg] 28
SJ-DL Series (Hollow shaft specifications)
Drive system Spindle motor 200V SJ-DL Series
22
SJ-V Series (Normal specification)
Motor type SJ-V2.2-01T SJ-VL2.2-02ZT *1
SJ-V3.7-02ZT SJ-V7.5-03ZT
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 40 40 80 160
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
16080S (L)
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − − 16080
SPV3- − − − 16080
SPHV3- − − − −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- 40 80 *2
− 160 *1
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
r/ min
2
0
1500 6000 10000
kW
4
6
2.2
1.5
1
0
3000 15000
kW
2
3
1.5
2.2
r/min
3000 12000 15000
3.7
6
4
2
0
2.2
kW
r/ min
2
0
4
6
kW
8
1500 1200010000
r/ min
5.5
7.5
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 2.64 2.64 4.44 9
Base rotation speed [r/min] 1500 3000 3000 1500
Max. rotation speed in constant output range [r/min] 6000 15000 12000 10000
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 9.5 4.77 7.0 35
] 0.00675 0.0024 0.00675 0.0245
Outline dimension drawing
(Flange type)
[mm]
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 150 f 110 f 150 f 180
Mass [kg] 25 20 25 60
*1 The maximum rotation speed is 10000r/min.
Motor type SJ-V11-08ZT SJ-V11-13ZT SJ-V15-01ZT
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- − − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − 20080 20080
SPV3- − 20080 20080
SPHV3- 20080
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- − − −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
5
0
1500 8000
kW
10
15
11
7.5
r/ min
5
0
10
15
kW
20
1500 6000 8000
r/ min
11
7.5
10
5
0
15
kW
20
1500 4500 8000
r/ min
11
15
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11 11 15
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 13.2 13.2 18
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 47.7 47.7 70
] 0.03 0.03 0.0575
(Flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 70 70 110
Drive system Spindle motor 200V SJ-V Series

61 6261 62
23
Motor type SJ-V15-09ZT SJ-V18.5-01ZT SJ-V18.5-04ZT SJ-V22-01ZT
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 200 200 240 240
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- − − − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − − −
SPV3- − − − −
SPHV3- 20080 − − −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- − − − −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
5
0
kW
15
10
20
1500 6000 8000
r/ min
11
15
5
10
0
kW
15
20
1500 4500 8000
r/ min
18.5
15
10
0
kW
20
30
1500 6000 8000
r/ min
18.5
15
10
0
kW
20
30
1500 4500 8000
r/ min
22
18.5
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 15 18.5 18.5 22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 18 22.2 22.2 26.4
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 70 95.5 95.5 118
] 0.0575 0.0575 0.0575 0.08
(Flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 110 110 110 135
Motor type SJ-V22-04ZT SJ-V22-06ZT SJ-V26-01ZT SJ-V37-01ZT
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 320 240 320 400
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- − − − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − −
SPV3- − − −
SPHV3- − − − −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- − − − −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
10
0
kW
20
30
1500 6000 8000
r/ min
22
18.5
10
0
1500 8000
r/ min
kW
20
30
11
15
kW
1500 6000 8000
r/ min
10
0
20
30 26
22
kW
1150 3450 6000
r/ min
20
0
40
60
37
30
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 22 15 26 37
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 118 70.0 140 249
] 0.08 0.0575 0.0925 0.34
(Flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 135 110 155 300
24
Motor type SJ-V45-01ZT SJ-V55-01ZT
Compatible drive
unit
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2- − −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- − −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
kW
1500 4500 6000
r/ min
20
0
40
60
45
37
20
0
kW
40
60
1150 3450 4500
r/ min
55
45
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 45 55
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 54 66
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 236 374
] 0.34 0.8475
(Flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 300 450

63 6463 64
25
SJ-V Series (Wide range constant output specification)
Motor type SJ-V11-01T SJ-V11-09T SJ-V15-03T SJ-V18.5-03T
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 160 160 200 240
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S (L) 16080S (L) − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- 16080 16080 − −
SPV3- 16080 16080 − −
SPHV3- − − 20080 −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- − − − −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
750 6000
5.5
3.7
r/ min
5
0
kW
10
15
750 6000
7.5
5.5
r/ min
5
0
kW
10
15
750 6000
9
7.5
r/ min
5
0
kW
10
15
5
0
kW
10
15
750 6000
11
9
r/ min
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 5.5 7.5 9 11
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 47.1 70.0 95.5 115
] 0.03 0.0575 0.0575 0.08
(Flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 70 110 110 135
Motor type SJ-V22-05T SJ-V22-09T SJ-VK22-19ZT
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- − − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2- − − −
Regenerative
resistor type
Output
Short-time rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Continuous rating
10
0
kW
20
30
750 6000
15
11
r/ min
10
0
kW
20
30
600500 3500 4500
18.5
15
r/min
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
10
0
kW
20
30
575 3450 6000
r/min
22
18.5
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 15 18.5 18.5 22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 18 22.2 22.2 26.4
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 140 239 310 307.3
] 0.08 0.31 0.34
(Flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 135 280 300
26
SJ-V Series (Hollow shaft specifications)
Motor type SJ-VS7.5-14FZT SJ-VKS26-09FZT SJ-VKS30-16FZT
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S(L) − −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- − − −
SPV3- − − −
Regenerative
resistor type
Output
Short-time rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Continuous rating
750 6000
5.5
7.5
15
10
5
0
kW
r/min
kW
r/minr/min
15
11
7.5
15
11
7.5
Low-speed coil High-speed coil
18
12
6
0
18
12
6
0
1500 4000 4000 15000
30
20
10
0
30
20
10
0
1500 4000
22
15
11
4000 15000
15
18.5
22
Low-speed coil High-speed coilkW
r/minr/min
Short-time rating (10min) (15min) (30min)
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 7.5 15 22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 9 18 26.4
Base rotation speed [r/min] 1500 1500 4000 1500 3000
Max. rotation speed in constant output range [r/min] 10000 4000 15000 4500 13600
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 35 47.7 17.9 70 47.7
] 0.0248 0.03 0.0575
(Flange type)
[mm]
459.5
208 SQ.
509.5
208 SQ.
565
250 SQ.
Mass [kg] 60 75 130

65 6665 66
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-VLSeries
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VSJ-VLSeries
27
SJ-VL Series (Low-inertia specification)
Motor type SJ-VL11-02FZT SJ-VL11-05FZT-S01 *1
SJ-VL18.5-05FZT
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- 16080S (L) 16080S (L) −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- 16080 16080 *2
−
SPV3- 16080 16080 *2
−
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- − 160 *3
−
Output
Short-time rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Continuous rating
1500 15000
11
2.2
10000
3.7
4000
ｒ/min
5
0
kW
10
15
5000 6000 18000 20000
r/min
5
0
kW
10
15
11
3
1.5
15000
18.5
5.5
5000
3.7
3000
2.2
ｒ/min
10
0
kW
20
30
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11 11 18.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 13.2 13.2 22.2
] 0.003 0.0024 0.00525
(Flange type)
[mm]
441
174 SQ.
441
174 SQ.
Mass [kg] 42 20 40
*1 The acceleration/deceleration frequency is limited by the regenerative resistor. *3 The maximum rotation speed is 12000r/min.
*2 The maximum rotation speed is 15000r/min. *4 The output can be changed by parameter.
Drive system Spindle motor 200V SJ-VL Series
28
SJ-VL Series (Hollow shaft specifications)
Motor type SJ-VLS15-11FZT
Compatible
drive unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 200
2-axis type MDS-D2-SP2- −
Multi axis
integrated type
MDS-DM2-
SPV2- −
SPV3- −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-SP- −
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
15000
18.5
30
20
10
0
7.5
11
3000 120004000
kW
r/min
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 18.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 22.2
] 0.0085
Degree of protection IP44
(Flange type)
[mm]
174 SQ.
475
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 150
Shaft diameter [mm] f 28
Mass [kg] 50

67 6867 68
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VBuilt-inspindlemotor
29
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B4A01T SJ-2B4002T SJ-2B4004T SJ-2B4003T SJ-2B4B01T
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 80 20 40 40 160
Output
Short-time rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Continuous rating
1
0
kW
2
3
2.2
1.5
1.0
r/min
50003400 10000
(15min)
0.3
0
kW
0.6
0.9
0.75
0.4
r/min
3000 10000
1
0
kW
2
3
1.5
0.75
r/min
3000 15000
1
0
kW
2
3
2.2
1.5
r/min
3000 12000
3
0
kW
6
9
7.5
3.7
2.2
r/min5500
50002500 10000
(15min)
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 2.64 0.9 1.8 2.64 9
Continuous base rotation speed [r/min] 5000 3000 3000 3000 5500
Rotor inertia [kg · m2
] 0.00020 0.00078 0.00078 0.00138 0.00163
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
f28(Note2)
f89.5(Note2)
110
f42
f109.5(Note2)
120
(Note2)
f42(Note2)
f109.5(Note2)
120 160
f42(Note2)
f109.5(Note2)
136
f52(Note2)
f114.5(Note2)
Mass
Stator [kg] 1.9 2.2 2.2 3.9 3.0
Rotor [kg] 0.5 0.9 0.9 1.7 1.5
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B4112T SJ-2B4111T SJ-2B4105T SJ-2B4102T SJ-2B4201T
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 40 80 80 80 40
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
1
0
kW
2
3
2.2
1.5
r/min
2500 10000
3
0
kW
6
9
3.7
5.5
r/min
6000 10000
2
0
kW
4
6
3.7
2.2
r/min
3000 12000 15000
2
0
kW
4
6
3.7
1.1
r/min
1500 6000 15000
1
0
kW
2
3
2.2
1.5
r/min
1500 6000 15000
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 2.64 6.6 4.44 4.44 2.64
] 0.00168 0.00168 0.003 0.00425 0.005
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
146
f45
f127.5(Note2)
f45
f127.5(Note2)
146
f45
f127.5(Note2)
200
f45
f127.5(Note2)
250
f60
f159.5(Note2)
165
Mass
Stator [kg] 4.1 4.1 7.4 10 7.1
Rotor [kg] 1.7 1.7 3.0 4.3 2.9
(Note 1) Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer for the special products not listed above.
(Note 2) These dimensions are the dimensions after machine machining.
SJ-B Series
Drive system Spindle motor 200V Built-in spindle motor
30
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B4218T SJ-2B4202T SJ-2B4215T SJ-2B4203T SJ-2B4219T
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 80 80 200 80 160
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
2
0
kW
4
6
3.7
1.5
r/min
1500 2500 10000
2
0
kW
4
6
3.7
2.2
r/min
1500 6000 15000
5
0
kW
10
15
5.5
3.7
11
r/min
1500
3000
7500 15000
3
0
kW
6
9
3.7
5.5
r/min
1500 4500 15000
3
0
kW
6
9
3.7
7.5
r/min
1500
2000
6000 15000
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 3.7 3.7 11 5.5 7.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 4.44 4.44 13.2 6.6 9
] 0.005 0.0068 0.0085 0.0088 0.0088
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
f60
f159.5(Note2)
165
f60
f159.5(Note2)
195 230
f60
f159.5(Note2)
225
f60
f159.5(Note2)
225
f60
f159.5(Note2)
Mass
Stator [kg] 7.1 10 13 13 13
Rotor [kg] 2.9 4.1 5.1 5.2 5.2
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B4310T SJ-2B4301T SJ-2B4327T SJ-2B4340T
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 80 160 160 200
Output
Short-time rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Continuous rating
3
0
kW
6
9
3.7
5.5
r/min
1500
1750
4500 8000
(30min)
3
0
kW
6
9
3.7
5.5
7.5
r/min
1100 81806000
1500
12000
5
0
kW
10
15
5.5
7.5
11
r/min
1500 2200
1700
6600 8000
(30min)
5
0
kW
10
15
7.5
11
r/min
1350 1500 7500 8000
(30min)
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 11
Continuous base rotation speed [r/min] 1750 1100 1700 1500
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 20.2 32.1 30.9 47.7
] 0.0128 0.0128 0.0175 0.0175
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
230
f75
f179.5(Note2)
230
f75
f179.5(Note2)
275
f75
f179.5(Note2)
270
f75
f179.5(Note2)
Mass
Stator [kg] 15 15 20 20
Rotor [kg] 5.6 5.6 7.6 7.6
SJ-B Series

69 7069 70
31
SJ-B Series
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B4313TK SJ-2B4323TK SJ-2B4325TK
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 160 200 240
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
3
0
kW
6
9
7.5
5.5
r/min
21001000
Low-speed coil
3
0
kW
6
9
5.5
7.5
r/min
1200080002100
High-speed coil
5
0
kW
10
15
11
7.5
5.5
r/min
21001000
5
0
kW
10
15
r/min
1200080002000
11
7.5
5.5
%ED rating (25%ED)
10
0
kW
20
30
15
11
r/min
520045001450
2000
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
120004700
22
15
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 7.5 7.5 11 11 15 22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 9 9 13.2 13.2 18 26.4
Continuous base rotation speed [r/min] 1000 2100 1000 2000 2000 4700
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 52.5 25.0 52.5 26.3 52.5 30.5
] 0.0175 0.0175 0.0175
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
280
f75 f179.5
(Note 2)
285
f75 f179.5
(Note 2)
295
f75 f179.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Stator [kg] 20 20 20
Rotor [kg] 7.6 7.6 7.6
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 200 240 320
Output
%ED rating
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
6
0
kW
12
18
7.5
5.5
11
r/min
30002300780
680
530
6
0
kW
12
18
r/min
1200080001250
2500
7.5
15
5.5
%ED rating (40%ED)
7
0
kW
14
21
15
11
7.5
r/min
25001050
1000
770
7
0
kW
14
21
r/min
1200080001600
2700
11
7.5
18.5
%ED rating (40%ED)
10
0
kW
20
30
22
15
18.5
r/min
350031501500
1260
1060
kW
r/min
1200090002570
3500
12
0
24
36
1200090002570
3500
30
22
18.5
%ED rating (15%ED)
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11 15 15 18.5 22 30
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 13.2 18 18 22.2 26.4 36
] 0.0225 0.0225 0.0225
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
335
f75 f179.5
(Note 2)
335
f75 f179.5
(Note 2)
345
f75 f179.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Rotor [kg] 9.8 9.8 9.8
32
SJ-B Series
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B4304TK SJ-2B4318TK SJ-2B4412T
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 320 320 160
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
%ED rating (25%ED)
6
0
kW
12
18
15
7.5
5.5
r/min
1500520
450 700
350
6
0
kW
12
18
r/min
120006000750
1500
15
7.5
5.5
%ED rating (25%ED)
10
0
kW
20
30
15
18.5
r/min
300025001200900
10
0
kW
20
30
22
18.5
r/min
12000100002500
3
0
kW
6
9
3.7
5.5
r/min
1500 8180 10000
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 15 15 18.5 22 5.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 18 18 22.2 26.4 6.6
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 117 70.0 119 70.7 23.6
] 0.028 0.028 0.0193
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
f75
f179.5
(Note 2)
405 405
f75
f179.5
(Note 2)
f85 f209.5
205
Mass
Rotor [kg] 12 12 6.2
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 200 200 320
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
6
0
kW
12
18
15
11
7.5
r/min
2250950700
6
0
kW
12
18
r/min
100001320
1800
15
11
7.5
6
0
kW
12
18
11
7.5
r/min
1500
500
460
6
0
kW
12
18
r/min
600057301030
42001400
15
11
7.5
10
0
kW
20
30
22
11
7.5
r/min
30001050525
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
100001050
2100
22
11
7.5
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 15 15 11 15 22 22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 18 18 13.2 18 26.4 26.4
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 102 54.3 143 69.5 136 68.2
] 0.08 0.102 0.105
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
320
f95 f229.5
(Note 2)
320
f110 f254.5
(Note 2)
f95 f229.5
(Note 2)
380
Mass
Rotor [kg] 18 19 24

71 7271 72
33
SJ-B Series
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 320 320 240
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
10
0
kW
20
30
15
11
r/min
2000550
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
800055001193
1750
22
11
15
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
10
0
kW
20
30
26
22
r/min
35001250
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
100003000
26
22
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
6
0
kW
12
18
15
11
r/min
1500440 1000
6
0
kW
12
18
r/min
600040001000
11
15
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 18 26.4 31.2 31.2 18 18
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 191 88.0 168 70.0 239 105
] 0.133 0.105 0.173
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
380
f110 f254.5
(Note 2)
380
f95 f254.5
(Note 2)
440
f110 f254.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Rotor [kg] 25 24 33
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 320 320 320
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
10
0
kW
20
30
15
11
r/min
2000475
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
1000050001250
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
22
15
10
0
kW
20
30
22
15
r/min
1500600 1000
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
600042001200
22
15
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
%ED rating (40%ED)
10
0
kW
20
30
22
18.5
r/min
2000600
720
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
1000070001500
22
18.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 18 26.4 26.4 26.4 26.4 26.4
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 221 115 239 119 245 118
] 0.135 0.173 0.135
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
445
f95
f229.5
(Note 2)
445
f110 f254.5
(Note 2)
440
f95
f254.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Rotor [kg] 31 33 31
34
SJ-B Series
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 320 320 200
Output
%ED rating
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
12
0
kW
24
36
22
15
r/min
20001200500
600
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
1000045001200
1600
30
22
%ED rating (25%ED)
%ED rating (15%ED)
10
0
kW
20
30
22
15
r/min
1500500 700
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
45001550
26
22
5
0
kW
10
15
11
7.5
r/min
750
270
250
5
0
kW
10
15
r/min
45003500540
11
7.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 26.4 36 26.4 31.2 13.2 13.2
] 0.15 0.20 0.288
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
480
f95
f229.5
(Note 2)
300
f130
f299.5
(Note 2)
400
f130
f299.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Rotor [kg] 34 26 38
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 320 400 400
Output
%ED rating
10
0
kW
20
30
400330 750
18.5
13
r/min
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
10
0
kW
20
30
22
15
11
r/min
1700500355
400 520
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
5000
1350
920
22
15
11
%ED rating (25%ED)
12
0
kW
24
36
26
18.5
15
r/min
2000450
630
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
6000
1750
1080
30
18.5
15
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
12
0
kW
24
36
26
15
22
r/min
600420350
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
4000
3230
2800600
700
30
26
22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 26.4 26.4 31.2 36 31.2 36
] 0.280 0.288 0.283
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
405
f130
f299.5
(Note 2)
405
f130
f299.5
(Note 2)
390
f145
f299.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Rotor [kg] 37 38 35

73 7473 74
35
SJ-B Series
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 320 320 400
Output
%ED rating
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
12
0
kW
24
36
22
18.5
r/min
1500500
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
60001500 3000
30
22
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
12
0
kW
24
36
22
15
r/min
1150350 475
420
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
60001200 3000
30
22
%ED rating (25%ED) (40%ED)
12
0
kW
24
36
22
15
r/min
15001150
420
350
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
60001000 3000
30
22
%ED rating (25%ED)
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 26.4 36 26.4 36 26.4 36
] 0.283 0.37 0.37
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
390
f145 f299.5
(Note 2)
f130
f299.5
(Note 2)
470 450
f130 f299.5
(Note 2)
Mass
Rotor [kg] 35 49 49
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 640 320 320
Output
%ED rating
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
15
0
kW
30
45
37
30
r/min
1000340
400
kW
r/min
3200650
37
30
15
0
30
45
%ED rating (25%ED)
10
0
kW
20
30
26
22
r/min
1500420
10
0
kW
20
30
r/min
40001000
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
26
22
%ED rating (50%ED)
12
0
kW
24
36
22 15
r/min
1000500175
12
0
kW
24
36
r/min
3300450 1500
30 22
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 44.4 44.4 31.2 31.2 26.4 36
] 0.675 0.853 1.105
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
f145
f329.5
(Note 2)
550
f165
f369.5
(Note 2)
465
f165
f369.5
(Note 2)
545
Mass
Stator [kg] 116 110 143
Rotor [kg] 72 70 91
36
SJ-B Series
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-2B6906TK SJ-2B6914TK
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 400 640
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
15
0
kW
30
45
22
15
r/min
1000680175
Low-speed coil
High-speed coilkW
r/min
3300600 1800
37
30
15
0
30
45
12
0
kW
24
36
30
25
r/min
1000240
kW
330031502100
700
470
45
30
25
20
0
40
60
r/min
Low-speed coil
High-speed coil
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 22 37 30 45
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 26.4 44.4 36 54
Continuous base rotation speed [r/min] 175 600 240 470
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 819 477 995 508
] 1.105 1.105
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
f165
f369.5
(Note 2)
555
f165
f369.5
(Note 2)
520
Mass
Stator [kg] 143 143
Rotor [kg] 91 91
SJ-PMB Series
Built-in spindle motor type (Note 1) SJ-PMB02215T-02 SJ-PMB04412T-B0 SJ-PMB14007T-01
Compatible
spindle drive unit
MDS-D2-SP- 240 200 320
Output
%ED rating
Continuous rating
3
0
kW
6
9
3.5
5.5
r/min
1500 10000
%ED rating (50%ED)
3
0
kW
6
9
7.5
5.5
r/min
30001200
3
0
kW
6
9
5.5
7.5
r/min
80003000
%ED rating (25%ED)
6
0
kW
12
18
15
11
r/min
1800750
6
0
kW
12
18
r/min
60001800
15
11
%ED rating (15%ED)
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 5.5 7.5 7.5 15 15
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 4) [kW] 6.6 9 9 18 18
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 22.3 43.8 17.5 140 58.4
] 0.006 0.0162 0.0633
Outline dimension
drawing
[mm]
150
f60 f139.5 f70.6 f179.5
225
250
f95 f254.5
Mass
Stator [kg] 4.4 14.0 30
Rotor [kg] 3.7 8.0 15

75 7675 76
DrivesystemSpindlemotor200VToolspindlemotor
37
HF-KP Series (Small capacity)
HF-SP Series (Medium capacity)
Drive system Spindle motor 200V Tool spindle motor
Motor type HF-KP46JW09 HF-KP56JW09 HF-KP96JW09
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type (Note 2) MDS-D2-SP2-
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-
SP- 20 20 20
SP2- 2020 2020 2020
Output
Rated torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 8
6
4
2
0
2.50
0.64
5.00
0.80
6.50
1.43
Rated output [kW] 0.40 0.50 0.90
] 0.24 0.42 1.43
60
118.7
60
140.6
80
149.1
Mass [kg] 1.2 1.7 2.9
Motor type HF-SP226JW09 HF-SP406JW09
Compatible
drive unit
2-axis type (Note 2) MDS-D2-SP2-
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
16080S (L)
Regenerative resistor type MDS-DJ-SP- – –
Output
Rated torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 60
50
40
30
20
10
0
22.0
3.50
50.0
6.37
Rated output [kW] 2.2 4.0
] 11.9 23.7
Degree of protection (The shaft-through portion is excluded.) IP67 IP67
140.5
130
184.5
130
Mass [kg] 6.8 10
(Note 1) This motor produces heat of about 100°C during high-speed rotation even when no load is connected. Mount the motor on a machine-side flange which has an appropriate size
for sufficient heat dissipation.
38
HF Series
Tool spindle motor type
HF Series
HF -A48
HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF224 HF204 HF354
Compatible
spindle drive
unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 20 20 40 40 80 80 80 160
2020
4020 (M)
2020
4020 (M)
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
16080S (M)
8080
8040 (L)
16080S (M)
8080
8040 (L)
16080S (M)
8080
16080S (L)
16080 (L)
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-
SP- 20 20 20 40 80 80 80 −
SP2- 2020 2020 2020 − − − − −
Output
Rated torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 100
80
60
40
20
0
7.0
1.8
8.1
2.4
12.1
1.6
23.3
3.2
33.9
4.8
46.5
7.0
46.5
6.4
74.5
11.1
Rated output [kW] 0.75 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.2 2.0 3.5
Rated rotation speed [r/min] 4000 3000
] 2.6 5.1 6.1 11.9 17.8 23.7 38.3 75.0
Degree of protection IP67 (The shaft-through portion is excluded.)
O u t l i n e d i m e n s i o n
drawing (flange type)
[mm]
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 80 f 80 f 110 f 110 f 110 f 110 f 114.3 f 114.3
Shaft diameter [mm] f 14 f 14 f 24 f 24 f 24 f 24 f 35 f 35
HF Series
HF -A48
HF123 HF223 HF303 HF453 HF703 HF903
Compatible
spindle drive
unit
1-axis type MDS-D2-SP- 20 40 80 160 160 320
2020
4020 (M)
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
16080S (M)
8080
16080S (L) 16080S (L) −
Regenerative
resistor type
MDS-DJ-
SP- 20 40 80 − − −
SP2- 2020 − − − − −
Output
Rated torque
Max. torque
[N · m] 200
150
100
50
0
17.0
5.7
32.0
10.5
64.0
14.3
89.3
14.3
116.5
22.3
171.0
28.7
Rated output [kW] 1.2 2.2 3.0 4.5 7.0 9.0
Rated rotation speed [r/min] 2000 3000
] 11.9 23.7 75.0 112.0 154.0 196.0
Outline dimension
drawing (flange type)
[mm]
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 110 f 110 f 114.3 f 114.3 f 114.3 f 180
(Note 1) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when combined with the drive unit.

77 7878
DrivesystemServomotor400VHF-HSeries
77
39
MEMO
40
HF-H Series
Drive system Servo motor 400V HF-H Series
Servo motor type HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154
Compatible
servo drive
unit
1-axis type MDS-DH2-V1- 10 10 20 20 40
2-axis type MDS-DH2-V2-
1010
2010 (M)
1010
2010 (M)
2010 (L)
2020
4020 (M)
2010 (L)
2020
4020 (M)
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
Output
Stall torque
Maximum torque
[N · m] 50
40
30
20
10
0
8.0
2.0
11.0
3.0
13.0
2.9
23.3
5.9
42.0
9.0
Rated output [kW] 0.75 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.5
] 2.6 5.1 6.1 11.9 17.8
Motor inertia with brake [kg · cm2
] 2.8 5.3 8.3 14.1 20.0
(flange type)
(Note) The total length will be 3.5mm
longer when using an A51 or
A74N detector.
[mm]
Absolute position
detector compatible
drive unit
16,000,000 [p/rev] (A74/A74N)
DH2 DH2 DH2 DH2 DH21,000,000 [p/rev] (A51)
260,000 [p/rev] (A48)
Servo motor type HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
Compatible
servo drive
unit
1-axis type MDS-DH2-V1- 40 80 80 80W 160
2-axis type MDS-DH2-V2-
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M)
8040 (L)
8080
8080W
8040 (L)
8080
8080W
8080W –
Output
Stall torque
Maximum torque
[N · m] 210
180
150
120
90
60
30
0
47.0
13.7
90.0
22.5
122.0
37.2
152.0
49.0
208.0
58.8
Rated output [kW] 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.0
] 38.3 75.0 112.0 154.0 196.0
Motor inertia with brake [kg · cm2
] 48.0 84.7 121.7 163.7 205.7
(flange type)
(Note) The total length will be 3.5mm
longer when using an A51 or
A74N detector.
[mm]
Flange fitting diameter [mm] f 114.3 f 114.3 f 114.3 f 114.3 f 180
Absolute position
detector compatible
drive unit
16,000,000 [p/rev] (A74/A74N)
DH2 DH2 DH2 DH2 DH21,000,000 [p/rev] (A51)
260,000 [p/rev] (A48)

79 8079 80
DrivesystemSpindlemotor400VSJ-4-VSeries
DrivesystemSpindlemotor400VSJ-4-VSeries
41
SJ-4-V Series (Normal)
Drive system Spindle motor 400V SJ-4-V Series
Spindle motor type SJ-4-V2.2-03T SJ-4-V3.7-03T SJ-4-V3.7-05ZT SJ-4-V5.5-07T SJ-4-V7.5-12T SJ-4-V7.5-13ZT
Compatible spindle
drive unit
MDS-DH2-SP- 20 20 20 40 40 80
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
r/ min
2
0
1500 6000 10000
kW
4
6
2.2
1.5
r/min
2
0
1500 6000 10000
kW
4
6
2.2
3.7
3000 12000 15000
3.7
6
4
2
0
2.2
kW
r/ min
r/min
2
0
1500 6000 8000
kW
4
8
6 5.5
3.7
1500 6000 8000
5.5
7.5
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
kW
r/min
1500 10000 12000
5.5
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
7.5
kW
r/min
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 2.2 3.7 3.7 5.5 7.5 7.5
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 2.64 4.44 4.44 6.6 9 9
Inertia [kg · m2
] 0.007 0.009 0.007 0.015 0.025 0.025
Degree of protection IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44
Outline dimension
drawing
(flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 25 30 25 49 60 60
Spindle motor type SJ-4-V11-18T SJ-4-V11-23ZT SJ-4-V15-18T SJ-4-V18.5-14T SJ-4-V22-15T SJ-4-V22-18ZT
Compatible spindle
drive unit
MDS-DH2-SP- 80 100 100 100 160 160
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
1500 6000
11
7.5
20
15
10
5
0
4500
kW
r/min
5
0
1500 8000
kW
10
15
11
7.5
r/ min
1500 6000
11
15
20
15
10
5
0
4500
kW
r/ min
kW
1500 6000
15
18.5
20
15
10
5
0
4500
r/ min
1500 4500 6000
18.5
22
30
20
10
0
kW
r/ min
10
0
1500 8000
r/ min
kW
20
30
11
15
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 11 11 15 18.5 22 15
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 13.2 13.2 18 22.2 26.4 18
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 47.7 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 70.0
Inertia [kg · m2
] 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.06
Degree of protection IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44
Outline dimension
drawing
(flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 70 70 110 110 135 125
(Note 3) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (380 to 440VAC 50Hz / 380 to 480VAC 60Hz) to the power supply unit.
If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 380VAC, the rated output may not be attained.
42
SJ-4-V Series (Normal)
SJ-4-V Series (Wide range constant output)
Spindle motor type SJ-4-V26-08T SJ-4-V30-15ZT SJ-4-V37-04T SJ-4-V45-02T SJ-4-V55-03T
Compatible spindle
drive unit
MDS-DH2-SP- 160 160 200 320 320
Output
Continuous rating
Short-time rating
1500 6000
26
22
30
20
10
0
kW
r/ min
10
0
kW
20
30
1500 8000
22
18.5
r/ min
1150 3450
30
37
60
40
20
0
kW
r/ min
1500 3450
45
37
60
40
20
0
kW
r/ min
1150 3450
45
5560
40
20
0
kW
r/ min
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 26 22 37 45 55
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 31.2 26.4 44.4 54 66
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 140 118 249 236 374
Inertia [kg · m2
] 0.10 0.08 0.31 0.55 0.85
Degree of protection IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44
Outline dimension
drawing
(flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 155 155 280 390 450
Spindle motor type SJ-4-V11-21T SJ-4-V15-20T SJ-4-V18.5-17T SJ-4-V22-16T
Compatible spindle
drive unit
MDS-DH2-SP- 80 100 160 160
Output
Short-time rating
Continuous rating
750 6000
7.5
5.5
r/ min
5
0
kW
10
15
750 6000
9
7.5
r/ min
5
0
kW
10
15
5
0
kW
10
15
750 6000
11
9
r/ min
10
0
kW
20
30
750 6000
15
11
r/ min
Standard output during acceleration/deceleration [kW] 7.5 9 11 15
Actual acceleration/deceleration output (Note 2) [kW] 9 10.8 13.2 18
Continuous rated torque [N · m] 70.0 95.5 115 140
Inertia [kg · m2
] 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08
Outline dimension
drawing
(flange type)
[mm]
Mass [kg] 110 135
(Note 3) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (380 to 440VAC 50Hz / 380 to 480VAC 60Hz) to the power supply unit.
If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 380VAC, the rated output may not be attained.

81 8282
Drivesystem200VMDS-D2-SPx/CV
81
Drivesystem200VMDS-D2-Vx
43
MDS-D2 Series
Drive system 200V MDS-D2-Vx
1-axis servo drive unit
Drive unit type MDS-D2-V1-20 MDS-D2-V1-40 MDS-D2-V1-80 MDS-D2-V1-160 MDS-D2-V1-160W MDS-D2-V1-320 MDS-D2-V1-320W
Drive unit category 1-axis servo
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20 40 80 160 160 320 320
Power input
Rated voltage [V] 270 to 311DC
Rated current [A] 7 7 14 30 35 45 55
Control
power input
Voltage [V] 200AC (50Hz) / 200 to 230AC (60Hz) Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -15%
Current [A] MAX. 0.2
Frequency [Hz] 50/60 Tolerable fluctuation: between +3% and -3%
Control method Sine wave PWM control method
Dynamic brakes Built-in External
Machine end detector Compatible
Cooling method Forced wind cooling
Mass [kg] 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.5 5.8 7.5
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 A1 A1 B1 C1 D1
Drive unit type MDS-D2-V2-2020 MDS-D2-V2-4020 MDS-D2-V2-4040 MDS-D2-V2-8040 MDS-D2-V2-8080 MDS-D2-V2-16080 MDS-D2-V2-160160 MDS-D2-V2-160160W
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20/20 40/20 40/40 80/40 80/80 160/80 160/160 160/160
Power input
Rated current [A] 14 (7/7) 14 (7/7) 14 (7/7) 21 (14/7) 28 (14/14) 44 (30/14) 60 (30/30) 70 (35/35)
Control
power input
Dynamic brakes Built-in
Mass [kg] 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.2 5.2 6.3
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 B1 B1 C1
Drive unit type MDS-D2-V3-202020 MDS-D2-V3-404040
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20/20/20 40/40/40
Power input
Rated current [A] 21 (7/7/7) 21 (7/7/7)
Control
power input
Mass [kg] 3.8 3.8
Unit outline dimension drawing A0 A0
44
MDS-D2 Series
Drive system 200V MDS-D2-SPx/CV
1-axis spindle drive unit
Drive unit type MDS-D2-SP-20 MDS-D2-SP-40 MDS-D2-SP-80 MDS-D2-SP-160 MDS-D2-SP-200 MDS-D2-SP-240 MDS-D2-SP-320 MDS-D2-SP-400 MDS-D2-SP-640
Drive unit category 1-axis spindle
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20 40 80 160 200 240 320 400 640
Power input
Rated current [A] 7 13 20 41 76 95 140 150 210
Control
power input
Mass [kg] 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.5 16.5 16.5
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 A1 B1 C1 D1 D2 E1 F1
Drive unit type MDS-D2-SP2-2020 MDS-D2-SP2-4020 MDS-D2-SP2-4040S MDS-D2-SP2-8040 MDS-D2-SP2-8080 MDS-D2-SP2-16080S
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20/20 40/20 40/40 80/40 80/80 160/80
Power input
Rated current [A] 14 (7/7) 20 (13/7) 26 (13/13) 33 (20/13) 40 (20/20) 61 (41/20)
Control
power input
Mass [kg] 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.2 6.5 5.2
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 A1 B1 C1 B1
Power supply unit
Power supply unit type MDS-D2-CV-37 MDS-D2-CV-75 MDS-D2-CV-110 MDS-D2-CV-185 MDS-D2-CV-300 MDS-D2-CV-370 MDS-D2-CV-450 MDS-D2-CV-550
Rated output [kW]
under
development
11.0 18.5 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0
Power input
Rated voltage [V] 200AC (50Hz) / 200 to 230AC (60Hz) Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -15%
Rated current [A] 35 65 107 121 148 200
Control
power input
Regeneration method Power regeneration method
Mass [kg] 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.5
Unit outline dimension drawing B1 B1 D1 D1 D2 F1
AC reactor
AC reactor model D-AL-7.5K D-AL-11K D-AL-18.5K D-AL-30K D-AL-37K D-AL-45K D-AL-55K
Compatible power
supply unit type
MDS-D2-CV- 37, 75 110 185 300 370 450 550
Rated capacity [kW] 7.5 11 18.5 30 37 45 55
Rated current [A] 27 40 66 110 133 162 200
Mass [kg] 4.2 3.7 5.3 6.1 8.6 9.7 11.5
Unit outline dimension drawing R1 R1 R2 R2 R3 R3 R4

83 8484
DrivesystemDriveunitoutlinedimensiondrawing
83
Drivesystem400VMDS-DH2Series
45
MDS-DH2 Series
Drive system 400V MDS-DH2 Series
Drive unit type MDS-DH2-V1-10 MDS-DH2-V1-20 MDS-DH2-V1-40 MDS-DH2-V1-80 MDS-DH2-V1-80W MDS-DH2-V1-160 MDS-DH2-V1-160W MDS-DH2-V1-200
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 10 20 40 80 80 160 160 200
Power input
Rated current [A] 0.9 1.6 2.9 6.0 8.0 11.9 16.7 39.0
Control
power input
Voltage [V] 380 to 440AC (50Hz) / 380 to 480AC (60Hz) Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -15%
Dynamic brakes Built-in External (MDS-D-DBU)
Degree of protection IP20 ([over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])
Mass [kg] 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.5 5.8 7.5 16.5
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 A1 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1
Drive unit type MDS-DH2-V2-1010 MDS-DH2-V2-2010 MDS-DH2-V2-2020 MDS-DH2-V2-4020 MDS-DH2-V2-4040 MDS-DH2-V2-8040 MDS-DH2-V2-8080 MDS-DH2-V2-8080W
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 10/10 20/10 20/20 40/20 40/40 80/40 80/80 80/80
Power input
Rated current [A] 1.8 (0.9/0.9) 2.5 (1.6/0.9) 3.2 (1.6 /1.6) 4.5 (2.9/1.6) 5.8 (2.9/2.9) 8.9 (6.0/2.9) 12 (6.0/6.0) 16 (8.0/8.0)
Control
power input
Control method Sine wave PWM control method · Current control method
Mass [kg] 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 5.2 5.2 6.3
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 B1 B1 C1
Drive unit type MDS-DH2-SP-20 MDS-DH2-SP-40 MDS-DH2-SP-80 MDS-DH2-SP-100 MDS-DH2-SP-160 MDS-DH2-SP-200 MDS-DH2-SP-320 MDS-DH2-SP-480
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20 40 80 100 160 200 320 480
Power input
Rated current [A] 10 15 21 38 72 82 119 150
Control
power input
Degree of protection IP20 ([over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])
Mass [kg] 3.8 4.5 4.5 5.8 7.5 16.5 16.5 22.5
Unit outline dimension drawing A1 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 E1 F1
(Note) Rated output capacity and rated speed of the motor used in combination with the drive unit are as indicated when using the power supply voltage and frequency listed.
The torque drops when the voltage is less than specified.
Power supply unit
Power supply unit type MDS-DH2-CV-37 MDS-DH2-CV-75 MDS-DH2-CV-110 MDS-DH2-CV-185 MDS-DH2-CV-300 MDS-DH2-CV-370 MDS-DH2-CV-450 MDS-DH2-CV-550 MDS-DH2-CV-750
Rated output [kW] 3.7 7.5 11.0 18.5 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0
Power input
Rated voltage [V] 380 to 440AC (50Hz) / 380 to 480AC (60Hz) Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -15%
Rated current [A] 5.2 13 18 35 61 70 85 106 130
Control
power input
Main circuit method Converter with power regeneration circuit
Mass [kg] 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.5 25.5
Unit outline dimension drawing B1 B1 B1 B1 D1 D1 D1 F1 F1
AC reactor
AC reactor model DH-AL-7.5K DH-AL-11K DH-AL-18.5K DH-AL-30K DH-AL-37K DH-AL-45K DH-AL-55K DH-AL-75K
Compatible power
supply unit type
MDS-DH2-CV- 37, 75 110 185 300 370 450 550 750
Rated capacity [kW] 7.5 11 18.5 30 37 45 55 75
Rated voltage [V] 380 to 440AC (50Hz) / 380 to 480AC (60Hz) Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -15%
Rated current [A] 14 21 37 65 75 85 106 142
Mass [kg] 4.0 3.7 5.3 6.0 8.5 9.8 10.5 13.0
Unit outline dimension drawing R1 R1 R2 R2 R3 R3 R5 R6
[Unit : mm]
A0 A1
B1 C1 D1
D2 E1 F1
(80)
200
350
380
360
60
200 60
360
90
350
380
200 60
(80)
350
380
120
360
200 60
(80)
350
380
150
360
(80)
150 200 67
350
380
360
210 92
(80)
240
360
380
(80)
210 92300
360
380
60
360
60
(80)
350
380
200
(80)
46
Drive system Drive unit outline dimension drawing
[Unit : mm]
A0 A1
B1 C1 D1
D2 E1 F1
(80)
200
350
380
360
60
200 60
360
90
350
380
200 60
(80)
350
380
120
360
200 60
(80)
350
380
150
360
(80)
150 200 67
350
380
360
210 92
(80)
240
360
380
(80)
210 92300
360
380
60
360
60
(80)
350
380
200
(80)

85 8686
Drivesystem200VMDS-DJSeries
85
Drivesystem200VMDS-DM2Series
47
MDS-DM2 Series
Multi-hybrid drive
Drive unit type MDS-DM2-SPV2-10080 MDS-DM2-SPV2-16080 MDS-DM2-SPV2-20080
Drive unit category 2-axis servo, 1-axis spindle (with converter)
Nominal maximum current (spindle/servo) [A] 100/80×2 160/80×2 200/80×2
Power input
Rated current [A] 33 43 55
Control
power input
Voltage [V] 24DC Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -10%
Current [A] MAX. 4
Dynamic brakes (servo) Built-in
Machine end detector (servo) Compatible
Mass [kg] 14.5 14.5 14.5
Drive unit type MDS-DM2-SPV3-10080 MDS-DM2-SPV3-16080 MDS-DM2-SPV3-20080 MDS-DM2-SPV3-200120 MDS-DM2-SPHV3-20080
Drive unit category 3-axis servo, 1-axis spindle (with converter)
Nominal maximum current (spindle/servo) [A] 100/80×3 160/80×3 200/80×3 200/120×3 200/80×3
Power input
Rated current [A] 38 48 60 65 60
Control
power input
Voltage [V] 24DC Tolerable fluctuation: between +10% and -10%
Current [A] MAX. 4
Dynamic brakes (servo) Built-in
Machine end detector (servo) Compatible
Mass [kg] 15 15 15 15 15
Unit outline dimension drawing
Drive unit MDS-DM2-SPᮀVᮀ-ᮀ [Unit : mm]
40
60 140 60
10
260
380
360
80
180 96
40
Drive system 200V MDS-DM2 Series
48
MDS-DJ Series
All-in-one compact servo drive unit
Drive unit type MDS-DJ-V1-10 MDS-DJ-V1-15 MDS-DJ-V1-30 MDS-DJ-V1-40 MDS-DJ-V1-80 MDS-DJ-V1-100
Drive unit category 1-axis servo (with converter)
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 10 15 30 40 80 100
Power input
Rated current [A] 1.5 2.9 3.8 5.0 10.5 16.0
Control
power input
Cooling method Natural cooling Forced wind cooling
Mass [kg] 0.8 1.0 1.4 2.3 2.3 2.3
Unit outline dimension drawing J1 J2 J3 J4a J4a J4b
Drive unit type MDS-DJ-V2-3030
Drive unit category 2-axis servo (with converter)
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 30/30
Power input
Rated current [A] 3.8/3.8
Control
power input
Current [A] 50/60 Tolerable fluctuation: between +5% and -5%
Frequency [Hz] MAX. 0.4
Machine end detector Not compatible
Mass [kg] 1.5
Unit outline dimension drawing JW1
All-in-one compact spindle drive unit
Drive unit type MDS-DJ-SP-20 MDS-DJ-SP-40 MDS-DJ-SP-80 MDS-DJ-SP-100 MDS-DJ-SP-120 MDS-DJ-SP-160
Drive unit category 1-axis spindle (with converter)
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20 40 80 100 120 160
Power input
Rated current [A] 2.6 9.0 10.5 16.0 26.0 35.4
Control
power input
Mass [kg] 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.0 4.0 6.2
Unit outline dimension drawing J3 J4a J4b J5 J5 J6
Drive unit type MDS-DJ-SP2-2020
Drive unit category 2-axis spindle (with converter)
Nominal maximum current (peak) [A] 20/20
Power input
Rated current [A] 2.6/2.6
Control
power input
Mass [kg] 1.5
Unit outline dimension drawing JW1
Drive system 200V MDS-DJ Series

87 8887 88
49
MDS-DJ Series
Unit outline dimension drawing
[Unit : mm]
50
MEMO

89 9089 90
DrivesystemSelection
Drive system Selection
Selection of the power supply unit
For the power supply unit, calculate the spindle motor output and servo motor output each, and select the
capacity satisfying the required rated capacity and the maximum momentary output.
Use of “Servo selection software” is recommended as a tool.
Calculation of spindle output
The spindle rated output and spindle maximum momentary rated output are calculated.
(1) Calculation of spindle rated output
The spindle rated output is calculated according to the following procedure.
(a) Spindle motor rated output
The spindle motor rated output is calculated from the following expression.
Spindle motor rated output =
MAX (continuous rated output, short-time rated output × short-time rated output
coefficient , %ED rated output × %ED rated output coefficient )
(Note) For the spindle motor rated output, use the maximum value of continuous rated output,
short-time rated output × short-time rated output coefficient a, and %ED rated output ×
%ED rated output coefficient .
For the spindle short-time rated output coefficient a, use the value in the following table.
List of short-time rated output time and short-time rated output coefficient
Short-time rated output time Short-time rated output coefficient a Short-time rated output time Short-time rated output coefficient a
1 minute 0.2 5 minutes 0.7
2 minutes 0.4 6 to 7 minutes 0.8
3 minutes 0.5 8 to 9 minutes 0.9
4 minutes 0.6 10 minutes or more 1.0
(Note 1) Select the set time for the short-time rated output of your spindle motor from the list.
E.g.) When the set time for the short-time rated output is “1/12h”, it means “5 minutes”.
(Note 2) For the motor with coil changeover specification, select the set time for the short-time rated output of the high-speed coil.
For the %ED rated output coefficient , use the value in the following table.
List of %ED rated output time and %ED rated output coefficient
%ED rated output time %ED rated output coefficient 
More than or equal to 10%
but less than 20%
0.7
More than or equal to 20%
but less than 30%
0.9
More than or equal to 30% 1.0
(b) Spindle rated output
The spindle rated output is calculated from the following expression.
Spindle rated output
=Spindle motor rated output × motor output coefficient  of the combined spindle drive unit
For the spindle motor rated output of the above expression, use the value calculated in (a).
For the motor output coefficient  of the combined spindle drive unit, use the value corresponding to the used
spindle drive unit in the following table.
Motor output coefficient list of combined spindle drive unit
MDS-D2 Series
Spindle motor
rated output
Combined spindle drive unit MDS-D2-SP-
20 40 80 160 200 240 320 400 640
~ 1.5kW 1.00 1.15 1.25 − − − − − −
~ 2.2kW − 1.00 1.15 1.30 − − − − −
~ 3.7kW − 1.00 1.05 1.20 − − − − −
~ 5.5kW − − 1.00 1.10 1.20 − − − −
~ 7.5kW − − − 1.00 1.15 1.20 − − −
~ 11.0kW − − − 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 − −
~ 15.0kW − − − − 1.00 1.05 1.10 − −
~ 18.5kW − − − − 1.00 1.00 1.05 1.10 −
~ 22kW − − − − − 1.00 1.00 1.05 1.15
~ 26kW − − − − − − 1.00 1.00 1.10
~ 30kW − − − − − − 1.00 1.00 1.05
~ 37kW − − − − − − − 1.00 1.05
~ 45kW − − − − − − − − 1.0
~ 55kW − − − − − − − − 1.0
MDS-DH2 Series
Spindle motor
rated output
Combined spindle drive unit MDS-DH2-SP-
20 40 80 100 160 200 320 480
~ 2.2kW 1.00 1.15 1.30 − − − − −
~ 3.7kW 1.00 1.05 1.20 − − − − −
~ 5.5kW − 1.00 1.10 1.20 − − − −
~ 7.5kW − − 1.00 1.15 − − − −
~ 11.0kW − − 1.00 1.05 1.15 − − −
~ 15.0kW − − − 1.00 1.10 − − −
~ 18.5kW − − − 1.00 1.05 1.10 − −
~ 22kW − − − − 1.00 1.05 1.15 −
~ 26kW − − − − 1.00 1.00 1.10 1.20
~ 30kW − − − − 1.00 1.00 1.05 1.15
~ 37kW − − − − − 1.00 1.05 1.10
~ 45kW − − − − − − 1.00 1.05
~ 55kW − − − − − − 1.00 1.00
~ 75kW − − − − − − − 1.00
POINT
[1] When the spindle motor applies to the wide range constant output specification or the high-torque
specification, the spindle rated output may become large.
[2] The spindle rated output is calculated from the motor output coefficient of the spindle drive unit used in
combination with the spindle motor.
(2) Calculation of spindle maximum momentary output
The spindle maximum momentary output is calculated from the following expression.
Spindle maximum momentary output
=MAX (short-time rated output × 1.2, output at acceleration/deceleration × 1.2)
(Note) For the spindle rated output, use the larger one of “short-time rated output × 1.2” and
“output at acceleration/deceleration × 1.2”.

91 9291 92
Calculation of servo motor output
(1) Selection with rated output
(2) Selection with maximum momentary output
For the rated output and maximum momentary output of the servo motor, use the value corresponding to the
servo motor in the following table.
Data for servo motor output selection
200V series
Motor HF 75 105 54 104 154 224 204 354
Rated output (kW) 0.75 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.2 2.0 3.5
Maximum momentary output (kW) 2.6 3.6 2.3 5.0 9.0 12.3 8.0 18.0
Motor HF 123 223 303 453 703 903 142 302
Rated output (kW) 1.2 2.2 3.0 4.5 7.0 9.0 1.4 3.0
Maximum momentary output (kW) 4.0 7.5 12.0 22.0 28.0 41.0 3.8 7.4
Motor HP 54 104 154 224 204 354 454 704 903 1103
Rated output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.2 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.0 11.0
Maximum momentary
output (kW)
2.3 4.3 8.0 11.0 11.0 15.0 21.0 27.0 33.0 50.0
Motor HF-KP 23 43 73
Rated output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75
Maximum momentary output (kW) 0.72 1.72 2.85
400V series
Motor HF 75 105 54 104 154 204 354 453 703 903
Rated output (kW) 0.75 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.0
Maximum momentary output (kW) 2.6 3.6 2.3 5.0 9.0 8.0 18.0 22.0 28.0 41.0
Motor HP-H 54 104 154 224 204 354 454 704 903 1103
Rated output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.2 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.0 11.0
Maximum momentary output(kW) 2.3 4.3 8.0 11.0 11.0 15.0 21.0 27.0 33.0 50.0
Motor HC-H 1502S-S10
Rated output (kW) 15.0
Maximum momentary output (kW) 59.0
(Note) The maximum momentary output in this table is reference data for selecting the power supply unit and is not data which guarantees the maximum output.
Selection of the power supply unit
Select the power supply unit from the total sum of the rate output and the maximum momentary output.
(1) Calculation of required rated output
(a) When there is only one servo motor axis
Power supply unit rated capacity  (Spindle rated output) + (Servo motor rated output)
(b) When there are two or more servo motor axes
Power supply unit rated capacity  (Spindle rated output) + 0.7  (Servo motor rated output)
Substitute the output calculated from (1) of “Calculation of spindle output” and (1) of “Calculation of servo motor
output” to the expression (a) and (b), and calculate the total sum of the spindle rated output and servo motor rated
output. According to this, select the power supply unit satisfying the rated capacity from the following table.
(2) Calculation of required maximum momentary output
Maximum momentary rated capacity of power supply unit ≧
 (Spindle maximum momentary output) +  (Maximum momentary output of servo motor
accelerating / decelerating simultaneously)
Substitute the output calculated from (2) of “Calculation of spindle output” and (2) of “Calculation of servo motor
output” to the above expression, and calculate the total sum of the “spindle maximum momentary output” and
“output of servo motor accelerating / decelerating simultaneously”. According to this, select the power supply unit
satisfying the maximum momentary rated capacity from the following table.
(3) Selection of power supply unit
Select the power supply unit of which the capacity is larger than that selected in the item (1) and (2).
Power supply unit rated capacity and maximum momentary rated capacity
MDS-D2 Series
Unit MDS-D2-CV- 37 75 110 185 300 370 450 550
Rated capacity (kW) 4.2 8 11.5 19 31 38 46 56
Maximum momentary rated capacity (kW) 16 23 39 60 92 101 125 175
MDS-DH2 Series
Unit MDS-DH2-CV- 37 75 110 185 300 370 450 550 750
Rated capacity (kW) 4.2 8 11.5 19 31 38 46 56 76
Maximum momentary rated capacity (kW) 16 23 39 60 92 101 125 175 180

93 9493 94
CAUTION
1. When two or more servo motor axes are connected, do the calculation with the largest
rated capacity of the servo motor if a value obtained by multiplying the total sum of the
servo motor rated output by “0.7” is smaller than the largest rated capacity of the servo
motors.
Example: HF Series
(1) For “HF903 (9.0kW) + HF104 (1.0kW)”, “0.7 × (9.0 + 1.0) = 7.0 9.0” is applied.
So, do the calculation with applying “9.0kW” to the total sum of the servo motor’s rated
output.
(2) For “HF903 (9.0kW) + HF903 (9.0kW)”, “0.7 × (9.0 + 9.0) = 12.6 9.0” is applied.
output.
Example: HF-H Series
(1) For “HF-H903 (9.0kW) + HF-H104 (1.0kW)”, “0.7 × (9.0 + 1.0) =7.0 9.0” is applied.
output.
(2) For “HF-H903 (9.0kW) + HF-H903 (9.0kW)”, “0.7 × (9.0 + 9.0) = 12.6 9.0” is applied.
output.
2. When reducing the time constant replacing the conventional motor with the HF,HP,HF-
KP,HF-H,HP-H or HC-H Series motor, the power supply capacity may rise because the
motor maximum momentary output increases more than the conventional motor. Therefore,
make sure to check the selection with maximum momentary rated capacity.
3. When the large capacity drive unit (MDS-D2-SP-400/640, MDS-DH2-SP-200/320/480,
MDS-DH2-V1-200) is connected to the power supply unit, always install the drive unit
proximally in the left side of the power supply unit and connect PN terminal with the
dedicated DC connection bar.
4. When using two large capacity drive units or more, the power supply unit is required for
each drive unit.
Required capacity of power supply
For the power supply capacity, calculate the required spindle rated output and servo motor rated output each, and
select the power supply capacity satisfying them.
(1) Spindle rate output required for power supply
The spindle rate output required for power supply is calculated from the following expression.
Spindle rate output required for power supply =
MAX (Spindle motor continuous rated output, Spindle motor output at accelerating /
decelerating, Spindle motor short-time output) × motor output coefficient  of combined
spindle drive unit
(Note) For the spindle rate output required for the power supply, multiply the largest one of “spindle
motor continuous rate output”, “spindle motor output at acceleration/deceleration” and “spindle
motor short time output” by the motor output coefficient  of the combined spindle drive unit.
For the motor output coefficient of the combined spindle drive unit, use the value
corresponding to the used spindle drive unit in the table on page 90 of (1) of “Calculation of
spindle output”.
(2) Servo motor rate output required for power supply
For the servo motor rate output required for power supply, use the value calculated in (1) of “Calculation of servo
motor output”.
(3) Calculation of rate output required for power supply
(a) When there is only one servo motor axis
Rated capacity required for power supply =
 (Spindle rate output required for power supply) + (servo motor rate output required for
power supply)
(b) When there are two or more servo motor axes
Rated capacity required for power supply =
 (Spindle rate output required for power supply) + 0.7  (servo motor rate output required
for power supply)
Substitute the output calculated from the item (1) and (2) to the expression (a) and (b), and calculate the rated
capacity required for the power supply.
(4) Calculation of required power supply
Power supply capacity (kVA) =
 {(Required rated capacity calculated in the item (3) (kW) / Capacity of selected power
supply unit (kW)) × Power supply capacity base value (kVA)}
The power supply capacity base value corresponding to the capacity of the selected power supply unit is as
the following table.
MDS-D2 Series
Unit MDS-D2-CV- 37 75 110 185 300 370 450 550
Power supply capacity base value (kVA) 5.3 11.0 16.0 27.0 43.0 53.0 64.0 78.0
MDS-DH2 Series
Unit MDS-DH2-CV- 37 75 110 185 300 370 450 550 750
Power supply capacity base value (kVA) 5.3 11.0 16.0 27.0 43.0 53.0 64.0 78.0 107.0

95 9695 96
Example for power supply unit and power supply facility capacity
MDS-D2 Series
(Example 1)
Axis name Motor Drive unit Rated output Maximum momentary output
X-axis HF354 (MDS-D2-V2-160160) 3.5kW 18kW
Y-axis HF354 (MDS-D2-V2-160160) 3.5kW 18kW
Z-axis HF354 (MDS-D2-V1-160) 3.5kW 18kW
Spindle Spindle motor 22kW
MDS-D2-SP-320
(Output coefficient 1.0)
22kW 26.4kW
Total
0.7 × (3.5 × 3) + 22
= 29.35kW
31kW (D2-CV-300)
(18 × 3) + 26.4
= 80.4kW
92kW (D-CV-300)
The power supply unit satisfying the total of the rate output and the maximum momentary output is MDS-D2-CV-300.
Required power supply capacity (kVA) = (29.35 / 30) × 43 = 42.1 (kVA)
(Example 2)
X1-axis HF453 (MDS-D2-V2-160160) 4.5kW 22kW
X2-axis HF453 (MDS-D2-V2-160160) 4.5kW 22kW
Y-axis HF354 (MDS-D2-V2-160160) 3.5kW 18kW
Z-axis HF354 (MDS-D2-V2-160160) 3.5kW 18kW
MDS-D2-SP-200
15kW 18kW
Total
0.7 × (4.5 × 2 + 3.5 × 2) + 15
= 26.2kW
31kW (D2-CV-300)
22 × 2 + 18 × 2 + 18
= 98.0kW
101kW (D2-CV-370)
(Example 3)
X-axis HF354 MDS-D2-V1-160 3.5kW 18kW
Y-axis HF204 MDS-D2-V2-8080 2.0kW 8kW
Z-axis HF204 MDS-D2-V2-8080 2.0kW 8kW
Spindle
Spindle motor 15kW
(High-torque motor)
MDS-D2-SP-320
16.5kW 18kW
Total
0.7 × (3.5 + 2.0 × 2) + 16.5
= 21.75kW
31kW (D2-CV-300)
18 + 8 × 2 + 18
= 52kW
60kW (D2-CV-185)
MDS-DH2 Series
(Example 1)
X-axis HF-H354 (MDS-DH2-V2-8080) 3.5kW 18kW
Y-axis HF-H354 (MDS-DH2-V2-8080) 3.5kW 18kW
Z-axis HF-H354 (MDS-DH2-V1-80) 3.5kW 18kW
MDS-DH2-SP-160
(Output 22kW)
22kW 26.4kW
Total
0.7 × (3.5 × 3) + 22
= 29.35kW
31kW (DH2-CV-300)
(18 × 3) + 26.4
= 80.4kW
92kW (DH2-CV-300)
The power supply unit satisfying the total of the rate output and the maximum momentary output is MDS-DH2-CV-300.
(Example 2)
X1-axis HF-H453 (MDS-DH2-V2-8080) 4.5kW 22kW
X2-axis HF-H453 (MDS-DH2-V2-8080) 4.5kW 22kW
Y-axis HF-H354 (MDS-DH2-V2-8080) 3.5kW 18kW
Z-axis HF-H354 (MDS-DH2-V2-8080) 3.5kW 18kW
MDS-DH2-SP-100
15kW 18kW
Total
0.7 × (4.5 × 2 + 3.5 × 2) + 15
= 26.2kW
31kW (DH-CV-300)
22 × 2 + 18 × 2 + 18
= 98.0kW
101kW (DH2-CV-370)
(Example 3)
X-axis HF-H354 MDS-DH2-V1-160 3.5kW 18kW
Y-axis HF-H204 MDS-DH2-V2-8080 2.0kW 8kW
Z-axis HF-H204 MDS-DH2-V2-8080 2.0kW 8kW
Spindle
Spindle motor 15kW
(High-torque motor)
MDS-DH2-SP-320
16.5kW 18kW
Total
0.7 × (3.5 + 2.0 × 2) + 16.5
= 21.75kW
31kW (DH2-CV-300)
18 + 8 × 2 + 18
= 52kW
60kW (DH2-CV-185)

97 9897 98
DrivesystemDedicatedOptions
51
Drive system Dedicated Options
Servo options
The option units are required depending on the servo system configuration. Check the option units to be required
referring the following items.
System establishment in the full closed loop control
Full closed loop control for linear axis
Machine side detector to be used
Detector signal
output
Interface unit
Drive unit
input signal
Battery
option
Remarks
Incremental
detector
Rectangular
wave signal
output
SR74, SR84
(MAGNESCALE)
Rectangular wave
signal
−
Rectangular
wave signal
−
Various scale
Rectangular wave
signal
−
Rectangular
wave signal
−
SIN wave
signal
output
LS187, LS487
(HEIDENHAIN)
SIN wave signal
IBV series
(HEIDENHAIN)
Rectangular
wave signal
−
EIB series
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
LS187C, LS487C
(HEIDENHAIN)
SIN wave signal
MDS-B-HR-11 (P)
(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC) Mitsubishi serial
signal
(Required)
Note
Distance-coded
reference scale
(Note 2)EIB series
(HEIDENHAIN)
Various scale SIN wave signal
MDS-B-HR-11 (P)
signal
(Required)
Note
Distance-coded
reference scale is
also available
(Note 2)
EIB series
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal output
SR75, SR85
(MAGNESCALE)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Absolute
position
detector
Mitsubishi serial
signal output
OSA105ET2A
OSA166ET2NA
(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Required
Ball screw side
detector
SR77, SR87
(MAGNESCALE)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
LC195M, LC495M,LC215M
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
LC193M, LC493M
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
AT343, AT543, AT545,
ST748 (Mitutoyo)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
SAM Series
(FAGOR)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
SVAM Series
(FAGOR)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
GAM Series
(FAGOR)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
LAM Series
(FAGOR)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
RL40N Series
(Renishaw)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
SIN wave
signal output
MPS Series
(MME Corp.)
SIN wave signal
ADB-20J60
(MME Corp.)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Required
(Note 1) When using the distance-coded reference scale, it is recommended to use with distance-coded reference check function. In this case, the battery option is required.
(Note 2) Use the option of M700V Series for the distance-coded reference scale.
Full closed loop control for rotary axis
Machine side detector to be used
Detector signal
output
Interface unit Output signal
Battery
option
Remarks
Incremental
detector
Rectangular wave
signal output
Various scale
Rectangular wave
signal
−
Rectangular
wave signal
−
SIN wave
signal output
ERM280 Series
(HEIDENHAIN)
SIN wave signal
EIB series
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Various scale SIN wave signal
MDS-B-HR-11 (P)
signal
(Required)
Note
Distance-coded
reference scale is
also available
(Note 2)
EIB series
(HEIDENHAIN)
Absolute
position
detector
Mitsubishi serial
signal output
MBA405W Series
(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Required
RU77
(MAGNESCALE)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
RCN223M, RCN227M
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
RCN727M, RCN827M
(HEIDENHAIN)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
RA Series (Renishaw)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
HAM Series (FAGOR)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
−
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
SIN wave
signal output
MPRZ Series
(MME Corp.)
SIN wave signal
ADB-20J71
(MME Corp.)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Not required
MPI Series
(MME Corp.)
SIN wave signal
ADB-20J60
(MME Corp.)
Mitsubishi serial
signal
Required
(Note 1) When using the distance-coded reference scale, it is recommended to use with distance-coded reference check function. In this case, the battery option is required.
(Note 2) Use the option of M700V Series for the distance-coded reference scale.
52
System establishment in the synchronous control
Position command synchronous control
The synchronous control is all executed in the NC, and the each servo is controlled as an independent axis.
Therefore, preparing special options for the synchronous control is not required on the servo side.
Speed command synchronization control
The common position control in two axes is performed by one linear scale. Basically, the multi axis integrated type
drive unit (MDS-D2/DH2-V2/V3) is used, and the feedback signal is divided for two axes inside the drive unit.
When the two 1-axis type drive units are used in driving the large capacity servo motor, the linear scale feedback
signal must be divided outside.
Required option in the speed command synchronous control
Machine side detector to be used For MDS-D2/DH2-V2/V3 For MDS-D2/DH2-V1 × 2 units Remarks
SIN wave signal output scale
MDS-B-HR-11 (P)
(Serial conversion)
MDS-B-HR-12 (P)
(Serial conversion/signal division)
Mitsubishi serial signal output scale − MDS-B-SD (Signal division)
Including the case that an interface unit
of the scale manufacturer is used with
SIN wave output scale.
(Note) The rectangular wave signal output scale speed command synchronous control is not available.
Dynamic brake unit (MDS-D-DBU)
Specifications
Type MDS-D-DBU
Coil specifications 24VDC 160mA
Wire size 5.5mm2
or more (For IV wire)
Compatible drive unit MDS-D2-V1-320W, MDS-DH2-V1-160W, MDS-DH2-V1-200
Mass 3kg
MDS-D-DBU
5 5
2020
140
5
200
190
20
14172.8
195.4
[Unit : mm]

99 10099 100
53
Battery option
This battery option may be required to establish absolute position system. Select a battery option from the table
below depending on the servo system.
Type ER6V-C119B A6BAT (MR-BAT) MDS-BTBOX-36 MR-BAT6V1SET
Installation type
Drive unit with
battery holder type
Dedicated case
type
Unit and battery
integration type
Drive unit with
battery holder type
Hazard class Not applicable
Not applicable
(24 or less)
Not applicable Not applicable
Number of
connectable axes
Up to 3 axes
Up to 8 axes
(When using
dedicated case)
Up to 8 axes 1 axis
Battery change Possible Possible Possible Possible
Appearance
ER6V-C119B
Battery
Battery
connector
To the
battery
holder
A6BAT
(MR-BAT)
MDS-BTCASE
Battery
Dedicated case 2CR17335A WK17
6V 1650mAh
11-04
Built-in battery MR-BAT6V1
Name plate
Date of
manufacture
Compatible
model
D2/DH2 s s s −
DM2 s s s −
DJ − − − s
Cell battery (ER6V-C119B)
Specifications
Battery option type
Cell battery
ER6V-C119B (Note 1)
Battery model name ER6V
Nominal voltage 3.6V
Number of connectable axes Up to 3 axes (Note 3)
Battery continuous backup time
Up to 2 axes: Approx. 10000 hours
3 axes connected: Approx. 6600 hours
Back up time from battery warning to alarm
occurrence (Note 2)
Up to 2 axes: Approx. 100 hours
3 axes connected: Approx. 60 hours
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s
DM2 s
DJ −
(Note 1) ER6V-C119B is a battery built in a servo drive unit. Install this battery only in the servo drive unit that executes absolute position control.
(Note 2) This time is a guideline, so does not guarantee the back up time. Replace the battery with a new battery as soon as a battery warning occurs.
(Note 3) When using ball screw side detector OSA166ET2NA/OSA105ET2A, both ball screw side detector and motor side detector need to be backed up by a battery, so the
number of load shaft should be two.
Cell battery (A6BAT)
Always use the cell battery (A6BAT) in combination with the dedicated case (MDS-BTCASE).
Specifications
Battery option type
Cell battery
A6BAT (MR-BAT)
Battery model name ER17330V
Nominal voltage 3.6V
Number of connectable axes 1 axis / (per 1 battery)
Data save time in battery replacement Approx.10000 hours
occurrence (Note)
Approx. 80 hours
(Note) This time is a guideline, so does not guarantee the back up time. Replace the battery with a new battery as soon as a battery warning occurs.
Specifications of the dedicated case MDS-BTCASE
Type MDS-BTCASE
Number of batteries installed Up to 8 A6BATs (MR-BATs) (Install either 2, 4, 6 or 8 A6BATs (MR-BATs))
Number of connectable axes
Max. 8 axes (It varies depending on the number of batteries installed.)
When A6BAT (MR-BAT)2, 1 to 2 axis/axes
When A6BAT (MR-BAT)4, 3 to 4 axes
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s
DM2 s
DJ −
54
Battery box (MDS-BTBOX-36)
Specifications
Battery option type
Battery box
MDS-BTBOX-36
Battery model name size-D alkaline batteries LR204 pieces (Note1)
Nominal voltage 3.6V (Unit output), 1.5V (Isolated battery)
Number of connectable axes Up to 8 axes
Battery continuous backup time Approx. 10000 hours (when 8 axes are connected, cumulative time in non-energized state) (Note2)
occurrence
Approx. 336 hours (when 8 axes are connected) (Note2)
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s
DM2 s
DJ −
(Note 1) Install commercially-available alkaline dry batteries into MDS-BTBOX-36. The batteries should be procured by customers.
(Note 2) These backup periods are estimated based on the JIS standard, assuming that the product is used at a room temperature. The actual backup period may vary
depending on the batteries (type and storage period after production, etc.) and the operating environment. Thus, regard these values only as a guide.
Converged battery option
When using the following battery options, the wiring between units which configure an absolute position system is required.
Battery option type Installation type Battery charge
A6BAT (MR-BAT) Dedicated case type (built-in MDS-BTCASE) Possible
MDS-BTBOX-36 Unit and battery integration type Possible
Cell battery (MR-BAT6V1SET)
Specifications
Battery option type
Cell battery
MR-BAT6V1SET (Note 1)
Battery model name 2CR17335A
Nominal voltage 6V
Number of connectable axes Up to 2 axes
Data save time in battery replacement Up to 2 axes: Approx. 10000 hours
occurrence (Note 2)
Approx. 100 hours
Compatible model
D2/DH2 −
DM2 −
DJ s
(Note 1) MR-BAT6V1SET is a battery built in a servo drive unit. Install this battery only in the servo drive unit that executes absolute position control.
(Note 2) This time is a guideline, so does not guarantee the back up time. Replace the battery with a new battery as soon as a battery alarm occurs.

101 102101 102
55
Ball screw side detector OSA105ET2A, OSA166ET2NA
Specifications
Detector type OSA105ET2A OSA166ET2NA
Electrical
characteristics
Detector resolution 1,000,000pulse/rev 16,000,000pulse/rev
Detection method Absolute position method (battery backup method)
Tolerable rotation speed at power off (Note) 500r/min
Detector output data Serial data
Power consumption 0.3A
Mechanical
characteristics for
rotation
Inertia 0.510−4
kgm2
or less
Shaft friction torque 0.1Nm or less
Shaft angle acceleration 4104
rad/s2
or less
Tolerable continuous rotation speed 4000r/min
Mechanical
configuration
Shaft amplitude (position 15mm from end) 0.02mm or less
Tolerable load (thrust direction/radial direction) 9.8N/19.8N
Mass 0.6kg
Recommended coupling bellows coupling
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s
DM2 s −
DJ s −
OSA105ET2A/OSA166ET2NA
3056
75DIA.
85 SQ.
[Unit : mm]
Twin-head magnetic detector (MBA Series)
Specifications
Detector type MBA405W-BE082 MBA405W-BF125 MBA405W-BG160
Electrical
characteristics
Detector resolution 4,000,000 pulse/rev
Detection method Absolute position method (battery backup method)
Tolerable rotation speed at power off 3000r/min 2000r/min 1500r/min
Accuracy (*1) (*2) ±4 seconds ±3 seconds ±2 seconds
Wave number within one rotation 512 waves 768 waves 1024 waves
Power consumption 0.2A or less
Mechanical
characteristics
for rotation
Inertia 0.5×10−3
kg · m2
2.4×10−3
kg · m2
8.7×10−3
kg · m2
Tolerable angle acceleration (time of backup) 500rad/s2
Tolerable continuous rotation speed 3000r/min 2000r/min 1500r/min
Mechanical
configuration
Drum inner diameter f 82mm f 125mm f 160mm
Drum outer diameter f 100mm f 150.3mm f 200.6mm
Drum mass 0.2kg 0.46kg 1.0kg
Degree of protection (*3) IP67
Outline dimension f 140mm×21.5mm f 190mm×23.5mm f 242mm×25.5mm
(*1) The values above are typical values after the calibration with our shipping test device and are not guaranteed.
(*2) The user is requested to install the magnetic drum and installation ring in the detector within the accuracy range specified herein. Even when the accuracy of the
detector when shipped and when installed by the user is both within the specified range, there is a difference in the installation position. Therefore, the accuracy at the
time of our shipment may not be acquired.
(*3) It is the degree of protection when fitted with a connector.
Drum inner
diameter
Drum
outer
diameter
MBA
405W-
BG1
60
A6W6EO
K*
CN1-1CN1-2
MBA
405W
-
BG1
60
A6W6
EOK
*
MC2D009
SC2D005
SER. J5AVV6W6EOK DATE1206
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP.
MADE IN JAPAN
A 0 ×I
67
104.1
29
100
CN3CN2
CN1-1CN1-2
Detector
Preamplifier [Unit : mm]
56
Spindle options
According to the spindle control to be adopted, select the spindle side detector based on the following table.
No-variable speed control (When spindle and motor are directly coupled or coupled with a 1:1 gear ratio)
: Control possible ×: Control not possible
Spindle control item Control specifications Without spindle side detector With spindle side detector
Spindle control
Normal cutting control 
This normally is not used for novariable speed
control.
Constant surface speed control (lathe) 
Thread cutting (lathe) 
Orientation control
1-point orientation control 
Multi-point orientation control 
Orientation indexing 
Synchronous tap control
Standard synchronous tap 
Synchronous tap after zero point return 
Spindle synchronous
control
Without phase alignment function 
With phase alignment function 
C-axis control C-axis control  (Note) 
(Note) When spindle and motor are coupled with a 1:1 gear ratio, use of a spindle side detector is recommended to assure the precision.
Variable speed control (When using V-belt, or when spindle and motor are connected with a gear ratio other than 1:1)
: Control possible ×: Control not possible
Spindle control item Control specifications
Without spindle side
detector
With spindle side detector
TS5690/ERM280/
MPCI/MBE405W Series
OSE-1024 Proximity switch
Spindle control
Normal cutting control    −
Constant surface speed control (lathe)  (Note 1)   ×
Thread cutting (lathe) ×   ×
Orientation control
1-point orientation control ×    (Note 3)
Multi-point orientation control ×   ×
Orientation indexing ×   ×
Synchronous tap control
Standard synchronous tap  (Note 2)   ×
Synchronous tap after zero point return ×   ×
Spindle synchronous
control
Without phase alignment function  (Note 1)   ×
With phase alignment function ×   ×
C-axis control C-axis control ×  × ×
(Note 1) Control not possible when connected with the V-belt.
(Note 2) Control not possible when connected with other than the gears.
(Note 3) When using a proximity switch, an orientation is executed after the spindle is stopped.
Cautions for connecting the spindle end with an OSE-1024 detector
[1] Confirm that the gear ratio (pulley ratio) of the spindle end to the detector is 1:1.
[2] Use a timing belt when connecting by a belt.

103 104103 104
57
Spindle side ABZ pulse output detector (OSE-1024 Series)
When a spindle and motor are connected with a V-belt, or connected with a gear ratio other than 1:1, use this spindle
side detector to detect the position and speed of the spindle. Also use this detector when orientation control and
synchronous tap control, etc are executed under the above conditions.
Specifications
Detector type OSE-1024-3-15-68 OSE-1024-3-15-68-8
Mechanical characteristics
for rotation
Inertia 0.1×10−4
kgm2
or less 0.1×10−4
kgm2
or less
Shaft friction torque 0.98Nm or less 0.98Nm or less
Shaft angle acceleration 104
rad/s2
or less 104
rad/s2
or less
Tolerable continuous rotation speed 6000r/min 8000r/min
Mechanical configuration
Bearing maximum non-lubrication time 20000h/6000r/min 20000h/8000r/min
Shaft amplitude (position 15mm from end) 0.02mm or less 0.02mm or less
Tolerable load
(thrust direction/radial direction)
10kg/20kg Half of value during operation 10kg/20kg Half of value during operation
Mass 1.5kg 1.5kg
Squareness of flange to shaft 0.05mm or less
Flange matching eccentricity 0.05mm or less
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s
DM2 s s
DJ s s
(Note) Confirm that the gear ratio (pulley ratio) of the spindle end to the detector is 1:1.
68102 33
f50
ٗ
[Unit : mm]
Spindle side detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8)
58
Spindle side PLG serial output detector (TS5690, MU1606 Series)
This detector is used when a more accurate synchronous tapping control or C-axis control than OSE detector is
performed to the spindle which is not directly-connected to the spindle motor.
Specifications
Sensor
Series type TS5690N64xx TS5690N12xx TS5690N25xx
xx (The end of the type name) 10 20 30 40 60 10 20 30 40 60 10 20 30 40 60
Length of lead [mm]
400
±10
800
±20
1200
±20
1600
±30
2000
±30
400
±10
800
±20
1200
±20
1600
±30
2000
±30
400
±10
800
±20
1200
±20
1600
±30
2000
±30
Detection
gear
Type MU1606N601 MU1606N709 MU1606N805
The number of teeth 64 128 256
Outer diameter [mm] f52.8 f104.0 f206.4
Inner diameter [mm] f40H5 f80H5 f140H5
Thickness [mm] 12 12 14
Shrink fitting [mm] 0.020 to 0.040 0.030 to 0.055 0.050 to 0.085
Notched fitting
section
Outer diameter [mm] f72.0 f122.0 f223.6
Outer diameter
tolerance
[mm] +0.010 to +0.060 -0.025 to +0.025 -0.025 to +0.025
The number of
output pulse
A/B phase 64 128 256
Z phase 1 1 1
Detection resolution [p/rev] 2 million 4 million 8 million
Absolute accuracy at stop 150 100 95
Tolerable speed [r/min] 40,000 20,000 10,000
Signal output Mitsubishi high-speed serial
Compatible
model
D2/DH2 s s s
DM2 s s s
DJ s s s
Notchedfittingsection
outerdiameter
12
29
Lead wire length
31.1
50
Detectiongearouter
Encoder mounting face
of machine side
[Unit : mm]

105 106105 106
59
Twin-head magnetic detector (MBE Series)
Specifications
Detector type MBE405W-BE082 MBE405W-BF125 MBE405W-BG160
Electrical
characteristics
Detector resolution 4,000,000 pulse/rev
Detection method Incremental
Accuracy (*1) (*2) ±4 seconds ±3 seconds ±2 seconds
Wave number within one rotation 512 waves 768 waves 1024 waves
Power consumption 0.2A or less
Mechanical characteristics
for rotation
Inertia 0.5×10−3
kg · m2
2.4×10−3
kg · m2
8.7×10−3
kg · m2
Tolerable continuous rotation speed 15000r/min 10000r/min 8000r/min
Mechanical
configuration
Drum inner diameter f 82mm f 125mm f 160mm
Drum outer diameter f 100mm f 150.3mm f 200.6mm
Drum mass 0.2kg 0.46kg 1.0kg
Degree of protection (*3) IP67
Outline dimension f 140mm×21.5mm f 190mm×23.5mm f 242mm×25.5mm
(*1) The values above are typical values after the calibration with our shipping test device and are not guaranteed.
(*2) The user is requested to install the magnetic drum and installation ring in the detector within the accuracy range specified herein. Even when the accuracy of the
detector when shipped and when installed by the user is both within the specified range, there is a difference in the installation position. Therefore, the accuracy at the
time of our shipment may not be acquired.
(*3) It is the degree of protection when fitted with a connector.
Drum inner
diameter
Drum
outer
diameter
MBA
405W-
BG1
60
A6W6EO
K*
CN1-1CN1-2
MBA
405W
-
BG1
60
A6W6
EOK
*
MC2D009
SC2D005
SER. J5AVV6W6EOK DATE1206
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP.
MADE IN JAPAN
A 0 ×I
67
104.1
29
100
CN3CN2
CN1-1CN1-2
Detector
Preamplifier [Unit : mm]
Spindle side accuracy serial output detector (ERM280, MPCI Series)
C-axis control detector is used in order to perform an accurate C-axis control.
Manufacturer HEIDENHAIN
MHI MACHINE TOOL
ENGINEERING CO., LTD
Detector type ERM280 1200 ERM280 2048 MPCI series
Interface unit type
EIB192M C4 1200 EIB192M C6 2048
ADB-20J20
EIB392M C4 1200 EIB392M C6 2048
Minimum detection resolution
0.0000183°
(19,660,800p/rev)
0.0000107°
(33,554,432p/rev)
0.00005°
(7,200,000p/rev)
Tolerable maximum speed 20000r/min 11718r/min 10000r/min
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s
DM2 s s
DJ s s
60
Detector interface unit
Serial output interface unit for ABZ analog detector MDS-B-HR
This unit superimposes the scale analog output raw waves, and generates high resolution position data. Increasing
the detector resolution is effective for the servo high-gain. MDS-B-HR-12 (P) is used for the synchronous control
system that 1-scale 2-drive operation is possible.
Specifications
Type MDS-B-HR-11 MDS-B-HR-12 MDS-B-HR-11P MDS-B-HR-12P
Compatible scale (example) LS186 / LS486/LS186C / LS486C (HEIDENHAIN)
Signal 2-division function × s × s
Analog signal input specifications A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase (Amplitude 1Vp-p)
Compatible frequency Analog raw waveform max. 200kHz
Scale resolution Analog raw waveform/512 division
Input/output communication style High-speed serial communication I/F, RS485 or equivalent
Tolerable power voltage 5VDC±5%
Maximum heating value 2W
Mass 0.5kg or less
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s s s
DM2 s − s −
DJ s s s s
RM15WTR-10S
RM15WTR-12S
5570
6.51526.5
165
46
RM15WTR-8Px2
40
4-5 DIA.
CON1CON2
CON4CON3
[Unit : mm]
Serial signal division unit MDS-B-SD
This unit has a function to divide the position and speed signals fed back from the high-speed serial detector and high-speed
serial linear scale. This unit is used to carry out synchronized control of the motor with two MDS-D2/ DH2-V1 drive units.
Specifications
Type MDS-B-SD
Compatible servo drive unit MDS-D2/DH2-V1-
Input/output communication style High-speed serial communication I/F, RS485 or equivalent
Tolerable power voltage 5VDC±10%
Maximum heating value 4W
Mass 0.5kg or less
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s
DM2 −
DJ s

107 108107 108
61
Serial output interface unit for ABZ analog detector EIB192M (Other manufacturer’s product)
Specifications
Type EIB192M A4 20mm EIB192M C4 1200 EIB192M C4 2048
Input signal A-phase, B-phase: SIN wave 1Vpp, Z-phase
Maximum input frequency 400kHz
Output signal Mitsubishi high-speed serial signal (MITSU02-4)
Interpolation division number Maximum 16384 divisions
Compatible detector LS187, LS487 ERM280 1200 ERM280 2048
Minimum detection resolution 0.0012mm
0.0000183°
(19,660,800p/rev)
0.0000107°
(33,554,432p/rev)
Outline dimension 98mm×64mm×38.5mm
Mass 300g
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s s
DM2 s s s
DJ s s s
Serial output interface unit for ABZ analog detector EIB392M (Other manufacturer’s product)
Specifications
Type EIB392M A4 20mm EIB392M C4 1200 EIB392M C4 2048
Input signal A-phase, B-phase: SIN wave 1Vpp, Z-phase
Maximum input frequency 400kHz
Output signal Mitsubishi high-speed serial signal (MITSU02-4)
Interpolation division number Maximum 16384 divisions
Compatible detector LS187, LS487 ERM280 1200 ERM280 2048
Minimum detection resolution 0.0012mm
0.0000183°
(19,660,800p/rev)
0.0000107°
(33,554,432p/rev)
Outline dimension 76.5mm×43mm×16.6mm
Mass 140g
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s s
DM2 s s s
DJ s s s
Serial output interface unit for ABZ analog detector ADB-20J Series (Other manufacturer’s product)
Specifications
Type ADB-20J20 ADB-20J60 ADB-20J71
Manufacturer MHI MACHINE TOOL ENGINEERING CO., LTD
Maximum response speed 10,000r/min 3,600m/min 5,000r/min 10,000r/min
Output signal Mitsubishi high-speed serial signal
Compatible detector MPCI series MPS series MPI series MPRZ series
Minimum detection resolution
0.00005°
(7,200,000p/rev)
0.05mm
0.000025°
(1,440,000p/rev)
0.000043°
(8,388,608p/rev)
Outline dimension 190mm×160mm×40mm
Mass 0.9kg
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s s s s
DM2 s s s s
DJ s s s s
62
Drive unit option
Optical communication repeater unit (FCU7-EX022)
When the distance of the optical communication cable between NC control unit and drive unit is over 30m (M700V/
M70V/E70 Series: maximum 30m, M700/M70/C70 Series: maximum 20m), the communication can be performed by
relaying the optical signal.
Using up to two units, relay of the total length of up to 90m can be performed.
Specifications
Type FCU7-EX022
DC24V input
Input voltage 24V±10% (21.6V to 26.4V)
Inrush current 35A
Power consumption 10W
Consumption current 0.4A
Optical interface
Channel number 2 channels
Connectable number Maximum 2
Dimension
Dimension (depth)135mm  (width)40mm  (height)168mm
Mounting method Screw cramp with M5 2 screw cramps
Mass 0.42kg
Compatible model
D2/DH2 s
DM2 s
DJ s
135405
168
[Unit : mm]]
DC connection bar
When connecting a large capacity drive unit with L+L- terminal of power supply unit, DC connection bar is required. In
use of the following large capacity drive units, use a dedicated DC connection bar. The DC connection bar to be used
depends on the connected power supply, so make a selection according to the following table.
Specifications
Series MDS-D2 MDS-DH2
Large capacity drive unit
MDS-D2-SP-400
MDS-D2-SP-640
MDS-D2-SP-400
MDS-D2-SP-640
MDS-DH2-SP-200
MDS-DH2-SP-320
MDS-DH2-SP-480
MDS-DH2-V1-200
MDS-DH2-SP-200
MDS-DH2-SP-320
MDS-DH2-V1-200
Power supply unit
MDS-D2-CV-300
MDS-D2-CV-370
MDS-D2-CV-450
MDS-D2-CV-550
MDS-DH2-CV-550
MDS-DH2-CV-750
MDS-D2-CV-300
MDS-D2-CV-370
MDS-D2-CV-450
MDS-DH2-CV-185
Required connection bar D-BAR-B1006
D-BAR-A1010
(Two-parts set)
DH-BAR-A0606
(Two-parts set)
DH-BAR-B0606 DH-BAR-C0606
Compatible
model
D2/DH2 s s s s s
DM2 − − − − −
DJ − − − − −
Side protection cover (D-COVER-1)
Install the side protection cover outside the both ends of the connected units.

109 110109 110
63
Regenerative option
Confirm the regeneration resistor capacity and possibility of connecting with the drive unit.
The regenerative resistor generates heats, so wire and install the unit while taking care to safety. When using the
regenerative resistor, make sure that flammable matters, such as cables, do not contact the resistor, and provide a
cover on the machine so that dust or oil does not accumulate on the resistor and ignite.
Combination with servo drive unit
Corresponding servo
drive unit
Standard built-in
regenerative resistor
External option regenerative resistor
MR-RB032 MR-RB12 MR-RB32 MR-RB30 MR-RB50 MR-RB31 MR-RB51
Parameter setting
value
1200h 1300h 1400h 1500h 1600h 1700h 1800h
Mass 0.5kg 0.8kg 2.9kg 2.9kg 5.6kg 2.9kg 5.6kg
Unit outline dimension
168mm×
30mm×
119mm
168mm×
40mm×
149mm
150mm×
100mm×
318mm
150mm×
100mm×
318mm
350mm×
128mm×
200mm
150mm×
100mm×
318mm
350mm×
128mm×
200mm
W1 W2 W3 W3 W4 W3 W4
External option
− −
GZG200W120
OHMK
×3
GZG200W39
OHMK
×3
GZG300W39
OHMK
×3
GZG200W20
OHMK
×3
GZG300W20
OHMK
×3
Regenerative capacity 30W 100W 300W 300W 500W 300W 500W
Resistance
value
40Ω 40Ω 40Ω 13Ω 13Ω 6.7Ω 6.7Ω
MDS-DJ-V1-10 10W 100Ω s s
MDS-DJ-V1-30 20W 40Ω s s s
MDS-DJ-V2-3030 100W 9Ω s s
Corresponding servo
drive unit
Standard built-in
FCUA-RB22 FCUA-RB37 FCUA-RB55
FCUA-RB75/2
(1 unit)
R-UNIT2
FCUA-RB55
2 units connected
in parallel
FCUA-RB75/2
2 units connected
in parallel
Parameter setting
value
2400h 2500h 2600h 2700h 2900h 2E00h 2D00h
30mm×
60mm×
215mm
30mm×
60mm×
335mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
355mm×
105mm×
114mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
W5 W5 W6 W6 W7 W6 W6
Resistance
value
40Ω 25Ω 20Ω 30Ω 15Ω 10Ω 15Ω
MDS-DJ-V1-10 10W 100Ω
MDS-DJ-V1-15 10W 100Ω
MDS-DJ-V1-30 20W 40Ω s
MDS-DJ-V1-40 100W 13Ω s s s s s
MDS-DJ-V1-80 100W 9Ω s s s
MDS-DJ-V1-100 100W 9Ω s
MDS-DJ-V2-3030 100W 9Ω s s
64
Combination with servo drive unit
CAUTION
The regenerative resistor is not incorporated in the spindle drive unit.
Make sure to install the external option regenerative resistor.
Corresponding
spindle drive unit
MR-RB12 MR-RB32 MR-RB30 MR-RB50
Parameter setting value 1300h 1400h 1500h 1600h
Mass 0.8kg 2.9kg 2.9kg 5.6kg
168mm×
40mm×
149mm
150mm×
100mm×
318mm
150mm×
100mm×
318mm
350mm×
128mm×
200mm
W2 W3 W3 W4
External option regenerative
resistor
GZG200W39OHMK
GZG200W120
OHMK×3
GZG200W39
OHMK×3
GZG300W39
OHMK×3
Regenerative capacity 100W 300W 300W 500W
Resistance value 40Ω 40Ω 13Ω 13Ω
MDS-DJ-SP-20 − s s
MDS-DJ-SP-120 − s
MDS-DJ-SP-160 −
MDS-DJ-SP2-2020 − s s
Corresponding
spindle drive unit
FCUA-RB22 FCUA-RB37 FCUA-RB55
FCUA-RB75/2
(1 unit)
Parameter setting value 2400h 2500h 2600h 2700h
Mass 0.8kg 1.2kg 2.2kg 2.2kg
30mm×
60mm×
215mm
30mm×
60mm×
335mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
W5 W5 W6 W6
Regenerative capacity 155W 185W 340W 340W
Resistance value 40Ω 25Ω 20Ω 30Ω
MDS-DJ-SP-40 − s s s s
MDS-DJ-SP-80 − s s s
MDS-DJ-SP-100 − s
MDS-DJ-SP-120 −
MDS-DJ-SP-160 −
MDS-DJ-SP2-2020 − s s s
Corresponding
spindle drive unit
R-UNIT1 R-UNIT2 R-UNIT3 R-UNIT4 R-UNIT5
FCUA-RB55
2 units connected
in parallel
FCUA-RB75/2
2 units connected
in parallel
Parameter setting value 2800h 2900h 2A00h 2B00h 2C00h 2E00h 2D00h
355mm×
105mm×
114mm
355mm×
105mm×
114mm
375mm×
276mm×
104mm
375mm×
276mm×
104mm
375mm×
276mm×
160mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
40mm×
80mm×
400mm
W7 W7 W8 W8 W9 W6 W6
Resistance value 30Ω 15Ω 15Ω 10Ω 10Ω 10Ω 15Ω
MDS-DJ-SP-20 −
MDS-DJ-SP-40 − s s s s
MDS-DJ-SP-80 − s s s s s s s
MDS-DJ-SP-100 − s s s s s s
MDS-DJ-SP-120 − s s s s s s
MDS-DJ-SP2-2020 −

111 112111 112
65
119
G3
G4
P
C
MR-RB032
30
168
128
350
G4G3CP
MR-RB50
20017
375
1.6276
340
18
104
29
TE1
R1
R2
AL1
AL2
AC1
AC2
E
375
1.6276
340
22
160
29
TE1
R1
R2
AL1
AL2
AC1
AC2
ETE1
R1
R2
AL1
AL2
AC1
AC2
E
355
1.6
105
321
114
29
G3
G4
P
C
MR - RB12
40
168
14920
150
100
G4G3CP
MR-RB30/32
31817
[Unit : mm]External option regenerative resistor unit
W7 W8 W9
W4
W5 W6
W3
W1 W2
66
Power backup unit MDS-D/DH-PFU
Use this unit to protect machines or drive units at power failure.
Specifications
Power backup unit type MDS-DH-PFU MDS-D-PFU
AC Input
Rated voltage [V]
AC380 to 480 (50/60Hz)
Tolerable fluctuation : between +10% and -10%
AC200 to 230 (50/60Hz)
Tolerable fluctuation : between +10% and -15%
Frequency [Hz] 50/60 Tolerable fluctuation : between +3% and -3%
Rated current [A] 2 4
DC Input/Output
Rated voltage [V] DC513 to 648 DC270 to 311
Rated current [A]
Regenerative input: MAX 200A
Power running output: MAX 160A
Regenerative input: MAX 300A
Power running output: MAX 200A
AC output for
control power
backup
Voltage [V] Single-phase 200 to 230VAC (50Hz or 60Hz) 50Hz at backup Single-phase 380 to 480VAC (50Hz or 60Hz) 50Hz at backup
Current [A] MAX 2 MAX 4
Maximum number of drive units to connect 6 units (except for the power supply unit)
Switching time Within 100ms after AC input instantaneous interruption
Minimum backup time
75ms or more
(AC380V input, at maximum number of drive units to connect)
75ms or more
(AC200V input, at maximum number of drive units to connect)
Degree of protection IP20 [except for the terminal block and connector area]
Cooling method Natural-cooling
Mass [kg] 4
90 200
380
[Unit : mm]
Regenerative resistor unit for power backup unit R-UNIT-6, R-UNIT-7
Specifications
Regenerative resistor type R-UNIT-6 R-UNIT-7
Corresponding power backup unit type MDS-DH-PFU MDS-D-PFU
Resistance value [Ω] 5 1.4
Instantaneous regeneration capacity [kW] 128 114
Tolerable regeneration work amount [kJ] 180 180
Cooling method Natural-cooling Natural-cooling
Mass [kg] 10 10
375
276
100
340
[Unit : mm]
119
G3
G4
P
C
MR-RB032
30
168
128
350
G4G3CP
MR-RB50
20017
375
1.6276
340
18
104
29
TE1
R1
R2
AL1
AL2
AC1
AC2
E
375
1.6276
340
22
160
29
TE1
R1
R2
AL1
AL2
AC1
AC2
ETE1
R1
R2
AL1
AL2
AC1
AC2
E
355
1.6
105
321
114
29
G3
G4
P
C
MR - RB12
40
168
14920
150
100
G4G3CP
MR-RB30/32
31817
[Unit : mm]External option regenerative resistor unit
W7 W8 W9
W4
W5 W6
W3
W1 W2

113 114113 114
67
Capacitor unit MDS-D/DH-CU
Specifications
Capacitor unit type MDS-DH-CU MDS-D-CU
Compatible capacitor unit type MDS-DH-PFU MDS-D-PFU
Capacity [µF] 7000 28000
DC Input/Output Rated voltage [V] DC513 to 648 DC270 to 311
Cooling method Natural-cooling Natural-cooling
Mass [kg] 11 11
150
60200
1535015
380
260
[Unit : mm]
68
MEMO

115 116115 116
DrivesystemSelectionofcables
Drive system Selection of cables
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Power Cable Brake cable
Drive unit side
Motor side
Drive unit side
Motor side
V1 V2 V3 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series HF75
20
2020
4020 (M)
202020
404040
CNU1S (AWG14)
CNP18-10S (14)
Applicable cable outline
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNU20S (AWG14)
CNB10-R2S (6)
f 4.0 to 6.0 (mm)
CNB10-R2L (6)
f 4.0 to 6.0 (mm)
HF105
HF123
HF142
HF54
40
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M) 404040
HF104
HF223
HF302
CNP22-22S (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
HF154
80
8040 (L)
8080
CNP18-10S (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
− 16080 (M) − CNU1S (AWG10)
HF224
80
8040 (L)
8080
− CNU1S (AWG14)
− 16080 (M) − CNU1S (AWG10)
HF204
80
8040 (L)
8080
− CNU1S (AWG14)
CNP22-22S (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
− 16080 (M) − CNU1S (AWG10)
HF303
80
8040 (L)
8080
− CNU1S (AWG14)
− 16080 (M) −
CNU1S (AWG10)
HF354
160
16080 (L)
160160
−
− 160160W − Terminal block connection
HF453
160
16080 (L)
160160 −
CNU1S (AWG10)
− 160160W
Terminal block connectionHF703 160W 160160W − CNP32-17S (23)
f 22 to 23.8 (mm)
CNP32-17L (23)
f 22 to 23.8 (mm)HF903 320 − −
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Drive unit side
Motor side
Drive unit side
Motor side
V1 V2 V3
Lead out in direction
of motor shaft
Lead out in opposite
direction of motor shaft
of motor shaft
HF-KP Series HF-KP23JW04-S6
20
2020
4020 (M)
202020 CNU1S (AWG14)
MR-PWS1CBL
M-A1-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-PWS1CBL
M-A2-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
CNU20S (AWG14)
MR-BKS1CBL
M-A1-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-BKS1CBL
M-A2-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
HF-KP43JW04-S6
HF-KP73JW04-S6
MDS-D2 Series Power Cable and Brake Cable for Servo Motor Selection List MDS-D2 Series Detector Cable and Connector for Servo Motor Selection List
Ball screw side
detectorServo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Cable Single connector
Detector: A48 Detector: A51/A74N
Drive unit side
Motor side
V1 V2 V3 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series HF75
20
2020
4020 (M)
202020
404040
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-6P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-7P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S (AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNV2E-6P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
HF105
HF123
HF142
HF54
40
4020 (L)
4040
8040 (M) 404040
HF104
HF223
HF302
HF154
80
8040 (L)
8080
− 16080 (M) −
HF224
80
8040 (L)
8080
−
− 16080 (M) −
HF204
80
8040 (L)
8080
−
− 16080 (M) −
HF303
80
8040 (L)
8080
−
− 16080 (M) −
HF354
160
16080 (L)
160160
−
− 160160W −
HF453
160
16080 (L)
160160
−
− 160160W −
HF703 160W 160160W −
HF903 320 − −
Ball screw side
detectorServo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Cable (Direct connection type)
Cable (Relay type)
Drive unit side
Motor side
V1 V2 V3
Lead out in direction of
motor shaft
motor shaft
HF-KP
Series
HF-KP23JW04-S6
20
2020
4020 (M)
202020
CNV2E-K1P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
Compatible with only
IP65
CNV2E-K2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
Compatible with only
IP65
CNV2E-6P-M
 : Length (m)
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV22J-K1P-0.3M CNV22J-K2P-0.3M
CNV2E-6P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
HF-KP43JW04-S6
HF-KP73JW04-S6

117 118117 118
MDS-D2 Series Power Cable for Spindle Motor Selection List
Spindle motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Power Cable
SP SP2 Drive unit side Motor side
SJ-D Series
(Standard)
SJ-D3.7/100-01
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
Terminal block connection
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
16080S (M) Terminal block connection
SJ-D5.5/100-01
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
SJ-D5.5/120-01
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
16080S (M)
SJ-D7.5/100-01
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-D7.5/120-01
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-D11/100-01
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-D5.5/120-02
160
200
−
− 16080S (L)
SJ-DJ Series
(Compact lightweight)
SJ-DJ5.5/100-01
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
SJ-DJ5.5/120-01
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
16080S (M)
SJ-DJ7.5/100-01
160 16080S (L)
SJ-DJ11/100-01
SJ-DJ15/80-01 200 −
SJ-DL Series
(Low-inertia) SJ-DL0.75/100-01T
20 −
CNU1S (AWG14)
−
2020
4020 (M)
SJ-DL1.5/100-01T
40 −
−
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M) CNU1S (AWG10)
SJ-DL5.5/150-01T
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-DL5.5/200-01T
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-DL7.5/150-01T
160 −
− 16080S (L)
Spindle motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Power Cable
SP SP2 Drive unit side Motor side
SJ-V Series
(Standard) SJ-V2.2-01T
40
4020 (L)
4040S
CNU1S (AWG14)
− 8040 (M) CNU1S (AWG10)
SJ-VL2.2-02ZT
40
4020 (L)
4040S
CNU1S (AWG14)
− 8040 (M) CNU1S (AWG10)
SJ-V3.7-02ZT
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
16080S (M)
SJ-V7.5-03ZT 160 16080S (L)
SJ-V11-08ZT
200
−
SJ-V11-13ZT
SJ-V15-01ZT
SJ-V15-09ZT
SJ-V18.5-01ZT
SJ-V22-01ZT
240
SJ-V22-06ZT
SJ-V22-04ZT
320
SJ-V26-01ZT
SJ-V37-01ZT 400
SJ-V45-01ZT
640
SJ-V55-01ZT
SJ-V Series
(Wide range constant output)
SJ-V11-01T
160 16080S (L)
SJ-V11-09T
SJ-V15-03T 200
−
SJ-V18.5-03T 240
SJ-V22-05T
320SJ-V22-09T
SJ-VK22-19ZT
SJ-VL Series
(Low-inertia)
SJ-VL11-02FZT
160 16080S (L)
SJ-VL11-05FZT-S01
SJ-VL18.5-05FZT 240 −

119 120119 120
MDS-D2 Series Detector Cable and Connector for Spindle Motor Selection List MDS-D2 Series Power Cable for Tool Spindle Motor Selection List
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Power Cable
Drive unit side
Motor side
SP SP2 Straight Right angle
motor shaft
HF-KP Series HF-KP46-JW09
20
2020
4020 (M) CNU1S (AWG14)
− −
MR-PWS1CBLM-A1-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-PWS1CBLM-A2-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
HF-KP56-JW09
HF-KP96-JW09
HF-SP Series
HF-SP226-JW09
80 −
CNP18-10S (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
− −
−
8040 (L)
8080
CNU1S (AWG10)
16080S (M)
HF-SP406-JW09 160 16080S (L)
HF Series HF75-A48
20
2020
4020 (M)
CNU1S (AWG14)
HF105-A48
HF123-A48
HF54-A48
HF104-A48
HF223-A48
40
4020 (L)
4040S
− 8040 (M) CNU1S (AWG10)
HF154-A48
HF224-A48
HF204-A48
HF303-A48
80 − CNU1S (AWG14)
−
8040 (L)
CNU1S (AWG10)
8080
CNP22-22S (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
16080S (M)
HF354-A48
160 16080S (L)
HF453-A48
HF703-A48
HF903-A48 320 −
CNP32-17S (23)
f 22 to 23.8 (mm)
CNP32-17L (23)
f 22 to 23.8 (mm)
MDS-D2 Series Detector Cable and Connector for Tool Spindle Motor Selection List
When connecting to a tool spindle motor (HF-KP) When connecting to a spindle side detector
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Cable
Single connector
Spindle side accuracy detector
TS5690 cable
Spindle side detector OSE-1024 cable
Drive unit
side
Motor side
Cable
Single connector Cable Single connector
SP SP2 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Straight Right angle
Drive unit
side
HF-KP
Series
HF-KP46-JW09
20
2020
4020 (M)
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP3EZ-2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNP3EZ-3P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
HF-KP56-JW09
HF-KP96-JW09
When connecting to a tool spindle motor (HF/HF-SP) When connecting to a spindle side detector
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Cable
Single connector
TS5690 cable
Drive unit
side
Motor side
Cable
SP SP2 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
HF-SP
Series
HF-SP226-JW09
80 −
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP3EZ-2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNP3EZ-3P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
HF-SP406-JW09 160 16080S (L)
HF
Series
HF75-A48
20
2020
4020 (M)
HF105-A48
HF123-A48
HF54-A48
HF104-A48
HF223-A48
40
4020 (L)
4040S
− 8040 (M)
HF154-A48
HF224-A48
HF204-A48
HF303-A48
80 −
−
8040 (L)
16080S (M)
8080
HF354-A48
160 16080S (L)
HF453-A48
HF703-A48
HF903-A48 320 −
When connecting to a spindle motor When connecting to a spindle side detector
Spindle motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-D2-
Motor side PLG cable Spindle side accuracy detector TS5690 cable Spindle side detector OSE-1024 cable
Cable
Single connector
Cable
SP SP2
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
SJ-D Series
(Standard)
SJ-D3.7/100-01
80 −
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP3EZ-2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNP3EZ-3P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
SJ-D5.5/100-01
80 −
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
SJ-D5.5/120-01
80 −
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
SJ-D7.5/100-01
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-D7.5/120-01
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-D11/100-01
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-D5.5/120-02
160
200
−
− 16080S (L)
SJ-DJ Series
(Compact
lightweight
specifications)
SJ-DJ5.5/100-01
80 −
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
SJ-DJ5.5/120-01
80 −
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
SJ-DJ7.5/100-01
160 16080S (L)
SJ-DJ11/100-01
SJ-DJ15/80-01 200 −
SJ-DL Series
(Low-inertia) SJ-DL0.75/100-01T
20 −
−
2020
4020 (M)
SJ-DL1.5/100-01T
40 −
−
4020 (L)
4040S
8040 (M)
SJ-DL5.5/150-01T
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-DL5.5/200-01T
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-DL7.5/150-01T
160 −
− 16080S (L)
SJ-V Series
(Standard) SJ-V2.2-01T
40
4020 (L)
4040S
− 8040 (M)
SJ-VL2.2-02ZT
40
4020 (L)
4040S
− 8040 (M)
SJ-V3.7-02ZT
80 −
−
8040 (L)
8080
16080S (M)
SJ-V7.5-03ZT 160 16080S (L)
SJ-V11-08ZT
200
−
SJ-V11-13ZT
SJ-V15-01ZT
SJ-V15-09ZT
SJ-V18.5-01ZT
SJ-V22-01ZT
240
SJ-V22-06ZT
SJ-V22-04ZT
320
SJ-V26-01ZT
SJ-V37-01ZT 400
SJ-V45-01ZT
640
SJ-V55-01ZT
SJ-V Series
(Wide range
constant output)
SJ-V11-01T
160 16080S (L)
SJ-V11-09T
SJ-V15-03T 200
−
SJ-V18.5-03T 240
SJ-V22-05T
320SJ-V22-09T
SJ-VK22-19ZT
SJ-VL Series
(Low-inertia)
SJ-VL11-02FZT
160 16080S (L)
SJ-VL11-05FZT-S01
SJ-VL18.5-05FZT 240 −

121 122121 122
MDS-DM2 Series Power Cable and Brake Cable for Servo Motor Selection List
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DM2-
Drive unit side Motor side
Drive unit side
Motor side
SPV2 SPV3 SPHV3 CN31(L/M/S) Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series
HF54
10080
16080
20080
10080
16080
20080
20080
RCN31S
RCN31M
Applicable cable
outline
f 1.25 to 5.5 (mm)
CNP18-10S (14)
Applicable cable
outline
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
Applicable cable
outline
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNU20S (AWG14)
CNB10-R2S (6)
Applicable cable
outline
f 4.0 to 6.0 (mm)
CNB10-R2L (6)
Applicable cable
outline
f 4.0 to 6.0 (mm)
HF104
HF223
HF302
CNP22-22S (16)
Applicable cable
outline
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
Applicable cable
outline
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
HF154
10080
16080
20080
200120
CNP18-10S (14)
Applicable cable
outline
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
Applicable cable
outline
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
HF224
HF204
CNP22-22S (16)
Applicable cable
outline
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
Applicable cable
outline
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
HF303
HF354 −
200120
−
HF453 − −
MDS-DM2 Series Detector Cable and Connector for Servo Motor Selection List
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DM2-
Cable
Single connector
Drive unit side
Motor side
SPV2 SPV3 SPHV3 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series
HF54
10080
16080
20080
10080
16080
20080
20080
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
CNU2S (AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
HF104
HF223
HF302
HF154
10080
16080
20080
200120
HF224
HF204
HF303
HF354 −
200120
−
HF453 − −
MDS-DM2 Series Power Cable, Detector Cable, and Connector for Spindle Motor Selection List
Power Cable
When connecting to a spindle motor When connecting to a spindle side detector
Spindle motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DM2- Drive unit
side
Motor side
TS5690 cable
Cable
Single connector
Cable
Single connector Cable
Single
connector
SPV2 SPV3 SPHV3
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
SJ-D Series
(Standard)
SJ-D5.5/100-01
10080 10080 −
Terminal
block
connection
Terminal
block
connection
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP3EZ-2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNP3EZ-3P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
SJ-D5.5/120-01
SJ-D7.5/100-01
SJ-D7.5/120-01
SJ-D11/100-01 16080 16080 −
SJ-D5.5/120-02
10080
16080
20080
10080
16080
20080
−
SJ-DJ Series
(Compact
lightweight
specifications)
SJ-DJ5.5/100-01
10080 10080 −SJ-DJ5.5/120-01
SJ-DJ7.5/100-01
SJ-DJ11/100-01 16080 16080 −
SJ-DJ15/80-01 20080 20080 −
SJ-DL Series
(Low-inertia)
SJ-DL5.5/150-01T
16080 16080
−
SJ-DL7.5/150-01T −
SJ-V Series
(Standard)
SJ-V7.5-03ZT 16080 16080 −
SJ-V11-08ZT − − 20080
SJ-V11-13ZT
20080 20080 −
SJ-V15-01ZT
SJ-V15-09ZT − − 20080
SJ-V Series
(Wide range
constant
output)
SJ-V11-01T
16080 16080 −
SJ-V11-09T
SJ-V15-03T − − 20080
SJ-VL Series
(Low-inertia)
SJ-VL11-02FZT
16080 16080 −
SJ-VL11-05FZT-S01

123 124123 124
MDS-DJ Series Power Cable and Brake Cable for Servo Motor Selection List
MDS-DJ Series Detector Cable and Connector for Servo Motor Selection List
MDS-DJ Series Power Cable, Detector Cable, and Connector for Spindle Motor Selection List
MDS-DJ Series Power Cable, Detector Cable, and Connector for Tool Spindle Motor Selection List
Power Cable Brake Cable
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DJ- Drive unit side
Motor side Motor side
V1 V2 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series HF75
30 3030
Supplied for each drive unit
CNP18-10S (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNB10-R2S (6)
f 4.0 to 6.0 (mm)
CNB10-R2L (6)
f 4.0 to 6.0 (mm)
HF105
HF123
40 −
HF142
HF54 30 3030
HF104
40 −
HF223
HF302
CNP22-22S (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
HF154
80 −
CNP18-10S (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)HF224
HF204
CNP22-22S (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
HF303
HF354 100 −
Power Cable Brake Cable
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DJ-
Drive unit side
Motor side Motor side
V1 V2
of motor shaft
of motor shaft
Lead out in opposite direction
of motor shaft
HF-KP Series HF-KP13J-S17
10 −
Supplied for each drive unit
MR-PWS1CBL
M-A1-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-PWS1CBL
M-A2-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-BKS1CBLM-A1-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-BKS1CBLM-A2-H
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
HF-KP23JW04-S6
HF-KP43JW04-S6 15 −
HF-KP73JW04-S6 30 3030
Motor side detector cable Ball screw side detector
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DJ-
Cable
Single connector Ball screw side detector OSA105-ET2
Drive unit
side
Motor side Cable Single connector
V1 V2 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series HF75
30 3030
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNE10-R10S (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
HF105
HF123
40 −
HF142
HF54 30 3030
HF104
40 −HF223
HF302
HF154
80 −
HF224
HF204
HF303
HF354 100 −
Motor side detector cable Ball screw side detector
Servo motor type
Drive unit type
MDS-DJ-
Cable (Direct connection type)
Cable (Relay type) Ball screw side detector OSA105-ET2
Drive unit side
Motor side Cable Single connector
V1 V2
Lead out in
direction
of motor shaft
Lead out in
opposite direction
of motor shaft
Lead out in
direction
of motor shaft
Lead out in
opposite direction
of motor shaft
Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF-KP
Series
HF-KP13J-S17
10 − CNV2E-K1P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
Compatible with
only IP65
CNV2E-K2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
Compatible with
only IP65
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV22J-K1P-0.3M
Length : 0.3 (m)
Compatible with
only IP65
CNV22J-K2P-0.3M
Length : 0.3 (m)
Compatible with
only IP65
CNV2E-8P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNE10-R10S (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
Applicable cable
outline
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
HF-KP23JW04-S6
HF-KP43JW04-S6 15 −
HF-KP73JW04-S6 30 3030
Power Cable When connecting to a spindle motor When connecting to a spindle side detector
Spindle motor type
Drive unit
type
MDS-DJ-SP-
When connecting to
a spindle motor
TS5690 cable
Drive unit side Motor side Cable
Single connector
Cable
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
Detector
side
Drive unit
side
SJ-D Series
(Standard)
SJ-D3.7/100-01 80
Supplied for
each drive unit
Terminal
block
connection
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP2E-1-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
CNEPGS
CNP3EZ-2P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNP3EZ-3P-M
 : Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30
CNU2S
(AWG18)
SJ-D5.5/100-01
100
Terminal block
connection
SJ-D5.5/120-01
SJ-D7.5/100-01
120
SJ-D7.5/120-01
SJ-D11/100-01 160
SJ-DJ Series
(Compact
lightweight)
SJ-DJ5.5/100-01
100
SJ-DJ5.5/120-01
SJ-DJ7.5/100-01 120
SJ-DJ11/100-01 160
SJ-V Series
(Standard)
SJ-V2.2-01T 40 Supplied for
each drive unitSJ-VL2.2-02ZT 80
SJ-V7.5-03ZT 160
Terminal block
connection
SJ-VL Series
(Low-inertia)
SJ-VL11-05FZT-S01 160
Terminal block
connection
Power Cable
Cable
Single connector
Drive unit type
MDS-DJ-
Drive unit side
Motor side
Drive unit side
Motor side
SP SP2
of motor shaft
Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF-KP Series HF-KP46-JW09
20 2020
Supplied for each
drive unit
MR-PWS1CBLM-
A1-H
:Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
MR-PWS1CBLM-
A2-H
:Length (m)
2, 3, 5, 7, 10
CNV2E-8P-M
:Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
:Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
CNU2S (AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
HF-KP56-JW09
HF-KP96-JW09
Power Cable
Cable
Single connector
Drive unit type
MDS-DJ- Drive unit side
Motor side
Drive unit side
Motor side
SP SP2 Straight Right angle Straight Right angle Straight Right angle
HF Series HF75-A48
20 2020
Supplied for each
drive unit
CNP18-10S (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNP18-10L (14)
f 10.5 to 14 (mm)
CNV2E-8P-M
:Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
CNV2E-9P-M
:Length (m)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30
CNU2S (AWG18)
CNE10-R10S (9)
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
CNE10-R10L (9)
f 6.0 to 9.0 (mm)
HF105-A48
HF123-A48
HF54-A48
HF104-A48
40 −
HF223-A48
HF154-A48
80 −
HF224-A48
HF204-A48 CNP22-22S(16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)
CNP22-22L (16)
f 12.5 to 16 (mm)HF303-A48

125 126125 126
DrivesystemListofcables
69
Optical communication cable
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For
CN1A/
CN1B/
OPT1A
For wiring between drive units (inside panel)
G396 L0.3M 0.3
s s s
G396 L0.5M 0.5
G396 L1M 1
G396 L2M 2
G396 L3M 3
G396 L5M 5
For wiring between drive units (outside panel)
For wiring between NC-drive units
G395 L3M 3
s s s
G395 L5M 5
G395 L7M 7
G395 L10M 10
For wiring between drive units (outside panel)
For optical communication repeater unit
G380 L5M 5
s s s
G380 L10M 10
G380 L12M 12
G380 L15M 15
G380 L20M 20
G380 L25M 25
G380 L30M 30
(Note1) For details on the optical communication cable, refer to the section “Optical communication cable specification” in Specifications Manual of each drive unit.
Battery cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For battery
unit
Battery cable
(For drive unit - battery unit)
DG21-0.3M 0.3
s s −
DG21-0.5M 0.5
DG21-1M 1
DG21-5M 5
Battery cable
(For drive unit -Battery box)
(Note) The battery box side is connected using a bare
conductor or a terminal bar.
DG23-0.3M 0.3
s s −
DG23-0.5M 0.5
DG23-1M 1
DG23-2M 2
DG23-3M 3
DG23-5M 5
DG23-7M 7
DG23-10M 10
5V supply/DO output cable
(For drive unit -Battery box)
(Note) The battery box side is connected using a bare
conductor or a terminal bar.
DG24-0.3M 0.3
s s −
DG24-0.5M 0.5
DG24-1M 1
DG24-2M 2
DG24-3M 3
DG24-5M 5
DG24-7M 7
DG24-10M 10
For drive
unit
Battery cable
(For drive unit - drive unit)
(Note) This cable is required to supply the power from the
battery unit to multiple drive units.
DG22-0.3M 0.3
s s −
DG22-0.5M 0.5
DG22-1M 1
DG22-2M 2
DG22-3M 3
DG22-5M 5
DG22-7M 7
DG22-10M 10
For CN9 Battery cable Connector set FCUA-CS000 − s s −
Power supply communication cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For CN4/9
Power supply communication cable SH21
0.35
s − −
0.5
0.7
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
30
Power supply communication cable connector set FCUA-CS000 − s − −
For CN23
Contactor control output connector
Applicable cable outline: 0.85mm2
to 3.5mm2
Finish outside diameter: to f 4.2mm
CNU23SCV2 (AWG14)
These connectors are
supplied for each power
supply unit.
−
s − −
s − −
For CN24 External emergency stop input connector CNU24S (AWG24) − s − −
Drive system List of cables
70
Power backup unit connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D-PFU DH-PFU
For CN41 Power supply communication cable SH21
0.35
s s
0.5
0.7
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
30
For CN43 Input/output connector for power backup unit CNU43S (AWG22) − s s
For TE1 Power connector for power backup unit CNU01SPFU (AWG14)
− s s
− s s
STO input connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For CN8
STO cable MR-D05UDL3M-B − s s s
STO short-circuit connector
supplied for each drive
unit.
−
Required when not using dedicated
wiring STO function.
s s s
Optical communication repeater unit
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For OPT1/2
For wiring between drive unit and optical communication
repeater unit/
For wiring between optical communication repeater units
G380 L5M 5
s s s
G380 L10M 10
G380 L12M 12
G380 L15M 15
G380 L20M 20
G380 L25M 25
G380 L30M 30
For DCIN
For optical communication repeater unit DC24V power
cable
F070
0.5
Y
DCIN
s s s
1.5
3
5
8
10
15
20
For DCIN/
ACFAIL
For optical communication repeater unit/
For connecting Mitsubishi power unit PD25, PD27
DC24V power cable (power OFF detection)
F110
0.5
Y
DCOUT
DCIN
CF01
s s s
1.5
3
5
8
10
15

127 128127 128
71
Servo / tool spindle detector cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For CN2/3
For HF/HF-H, HF-KP (Tool spindle)
Motor side detector cable (for A48/A51/ A74N)
CNV2E-8P-2M 2
s s s
CNV2E-8P-3M 3
CNV2E-8P-4M 4
CNV2E-8P-5M 5
CNV2E-8P-7M 7
CNV2E-8P-10M 10
CNV2E-8P-15M 15
CNV2E-8P-20M 20
CNV2E-8P-25M 25
CNV2E-8P-30M 30
CNV2E-9P-2M 2
s s s
CNV2E-9P-3M 3
CNV2E-9P-4M 4
CNV2E-9P-5M 5
CNV2E-9P-7M 7
CNV2E-9P-10M 10
CNV2E-9P-15M 15
CNV2E-9P-20M 20
CNV2E-9P-25M 25
CNV2E-9P-30M 30
For CN2/3
Direct
connection
type
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side detector
cable
Lead out in direction of motor shaft
Compatible with only IP65
CNV2E-K1P-2M 2
s − s
CNV2E-K1P-3M 3
CNV2E-K1P-5M 5
CNV2E-K1P-7M 7
CNV2E-K1P-10M 10
cable
Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft
CNV2E-K2P-2M 2
s − s
CNV2E-K2P-3M 3
CNV2E-K2P-5M 5
CNV2E-K2P-7M 7
CNV2E-K2P-10M 10
Relay type
(Note)
relay cable (motor side)
CNV22J-K1P-0.3M 0.3 s − s
relay cable (motor side)
CNV22J-K2P-0.3M 0.3 s − s
relay cable (Drive unit side)
CNV2E-8P-2M 2
s − s
CNV2E-8P-3M 3
CNV2E-8P-4M 4
CNV2E-8P-5M 5
CNV2E-8P-7M 7
CNV2E-8P-10M 10
CNV2E-8P-15M 15
CNV2E-8P-20M 20
CNV2E-8P-25M 25
CNV2E-8P-30M 30
For motor
detector/ Ball
screw side
detector
Motor side detector connector/
Ball screw side detector connector
Applicable cable outline f 6.0 to 9.0mm
CNE10-R10S (9) − s s s
CNE10-R10L (9) − s s s
(Note) When using cable of 15m or longer, use relay cable.
72
Servo / tool spindle detector cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For CN2/3 MDS-B-HR unit cable
CNV2E-HP-2M 2
s s s
CNV2E-HP-3M 3
CNV2E-HP-4M 4
CNV2E-HP-5M 5
CNV2E-HP-7M 7
CNV2E-HP-10M 10
CNV2E-HP-15M 15
CNV2E-HP-20M 20
CNV2E-HP-25M 25
CNV2E-HP-30M 30
For MDS-B-
HR unit
MDS-B-HR connector
(For CON1,2: 1)
(For CON3: 1)
Applicable cable outline f 8.5 to 11mm
CNEHRS (10) − s s s
For CN3 MDS-B-SD unit cable
CNV2E-D-2M 2
s − −
CNV2E-D-3M 3
CNV2E-D-4M 4
CNV2E-D-5M 5
CNV2E-D-7M 7
CNV2E-D-10M 10
CNV2E-D-15M 15
CNV2E-D-20M 20
CNV2E-D-25M 25
CNV2E-D-30M 30
For MDS-B-
SD unit
MDS-B-SD connector (Two-piece set) FCUA-CS000 − s − −
For CN2/3 Detector connector CNU2S (AWG18) − s s s
Brake cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For
motor brake
Brake connector for
200V Series
HF
400V Series
HF-H brake connector
CNB10-R2S (6) − s s s
CNB10-R2L (6) − s s s
Brake cable for
200V Series
HF-KP
MR-BKS1CBL 2M-A1-H 2
s s s
Brake cable for
200V Series
HF-KP
s s s
For CN20 Brake connector for motor brake control output CNU20S (AWG14) − s s −

129 130129 130
73
Power cable
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For
motor power
Power connector for
200V Series
HF75, 105, 54, 104, 154,
224, 123, 223, 142
400V Series
HF-H54, 75, 104, 105, 154
CNP18-10S (14) − s s s
CNP18-10L (14) − s s s
Power connector for
200V Series
HF204, 354, 303, 453, 302
400V Series
HF-H204, 354, 453, 703
CNP22-22S (16) − s s s
CNP22-22L (16) − s s s
Power connector for
200V Series
HF703, 903
400V Series
HF-H903
Applicable cable outline f 22 to 23.8mm
CNP32-17S (23) − s − −
CNP32-17L (23) − s − −
Power cable for
200V Series
HF-KP
MR-PWS1CBL 2M-A1-H 2
s − s
Power cable for
200V Series
HF-KP
(Note) It can not be used with HF-KP13.
s − s
For TE1
Power connector for
MDS-D2-V1-20 to 80
MDS-D2-V2-2020 to 8080
MDS-D2-SP-20 to 40
MDS-D2-SP2-2020 to 4040
MDS-DH2-V1-10 to 80
MDS-DH2-V2-1010 to 8080
MDS-DH2-SP-20, 40
MDS-D2-V3-202020 to 404040
CNU1S (AWG14) − s − −
Power connector for
MDS-D2-V1-160
MDS-D2-V2-16080, 160160
MDS-D2-SP-80
MDS-D2-SP2-8040, 8080
MDS-DH2-V1-80, 80W
MDS-DH2-V2-8080W
MDS-DH2-SP-80
CNU1S (AWG10) − s − −
For CN31
L/M/S
Power connector for MDS-DM2 Series
RCN31S(AWG14,
AWG16)
(Note) For servo 80
RCN31M(AWG10,
AWG12)
(Note) For servo 120
− − s −
For CN22
Control power connector for MDS-DM2 Series
RCN22 − − s −
74
Drive unit side main circuit connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For drive unit
For MDS-DJ-V1-10, 15, 30
For MDS-DJ-SP-20
Applicable cable outline: 0.8mm2
to 2.1mm2
Finish outside diameter: to f 3.9mm
unit.
− − − s
− − − s
− − − s
− − − s
For MDS-DJ-V1-40, 80, 100
For MDS-DJ-SP-40, 80
Applicable cable outline: (For CNP1, for CNP3)
1.25mm2
to 5.5mm2
(For CNP2)
0.14mm2
to 2.1mm2
Finish outside diameter: (For CNP1, for CNP3)
to f 4.7mm
(For CNP2)
to f 3.9mm2
unit.
− − − s
− − − s
− − − s
− − − s
For MDS-DJ-V2-3030
For MDS-DJ-SP2-2020
Applicable cable size:
(For CNP1) 1.25mm2
to 2.0mm2
(For CNP2) 1.25mm2
to 2.0mm2
(For CNP3) 1.25mm2
to 2.2mm2
Cable ﬁnish outside diameter:
(For CNP1) to φ4.2mm
unit.
− − s
− − s
− − s
− − s
Spindle detector cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For CN2
TS5690 cable
CNP2E-1-2M 2
s s s
CNP2E-1-3M 3
CNP2E-1-4M 4
CNP2E-1-5M 5
CNP2E-1-7M 7
CNP2E-1-10M 10
CNP2E-1-15M 15
CNP2E-1-20M 20
CNP2E-1-25M 25
CNP2E-1-30M 30
For CN3
OSE-1024 cable
CNP3EZ-2P-2M 2
s s s
CNP3EZ-2P-3M 3
CNP3EZ-2P-4M 4
CNP3EZ-2P-5M 5
CNP3EZ-2P-7M 7
CNP3EZ-2P-10M 10
CNP3EZ-2P-15M 15
CNP3EZ-2P-20M 20
CNP3EZ-2P-25M 25
CNP3EZ-2P-30M 30
CNP3EZ-3P-2M 2
s s s
CNP3EZ-3P-3M 3
CNP3EZ-3P-4M 4
CNP3EZ-3P-5M 5
CNP3EZ-3P-7M 7
CNP3EZ-3P-10M 10
CNP3EZ-3P-15M 15
CNP3EZ-3P-20M 20
CNP3EZ-3P-25M 25
CNP3EZ-3P-30M 30
For spindle
motor
Motor side PLG connector
TS5690 connector
CNEPGS − s s s
OSE-1024 cable
Applicable cable outline f6.8 to 10mm
− s s s
− s s s
For CN2/3 Spindle detector drive unit side connector CNU2S (AWG18) − s s s
Twin-head magnetic detector ( MBE405W / MBA405W ) cable and connector
Item Model
Length
(m)
Contents
Compatible model
D2/DH2 DM2 DJ
For CN2/3
Cable for
MBE405W/MBA405W
CNV2E-MB-2M 2
s s s
CNV2E-MB-3M 3
CNV2E-MB-4M 4
CNV2E-MB-5M 5
CNV2E-MB-7M 7
CNV2E-MB-10M 10
CNV2E-MB-15M 15
CNV2E-MB-20M 20
Connector for MBE405W/MBA405W CNEMB2S (8) − s s s
For CN3 of
preamplifier
Thermistor connector for MBE405W/ MBA405W CNEMB3S (8) − s s s

131 132131 132
UserSupportTools/DevelopmentTools
UserSupportTools/DevelopmentTools
User Support Tools/Development Tools
NC Maintainer
A software tool for a personal computer to carry out
maintenance (such as parameter setting, NC diagnosis
and PLC program diagnosis) of MITSUBISHI CNC on
customer’s display.
Customer’s display
Diagnosis screen
Control unit
Maintenance screen PLC program diagnosis screen
Ethernet
communication
* An operation check is required in combination with software installed on the display.
Ethernet
Insert
CF card
CF card
M700V/M70V/E70 Series M700VW Series
Remote Monitoring Tool Data Transfer Tool
Servo Adjustment
Support Tool
Parameter Setup
Support Tool
PCMCIA
card
Insert
NC Designer
Screen Design Tool
• By laying out ready-made standard parts, you can
easily create original screens without programming.
• Using the C language source generation function of
NC Designer, customized functions can be added by
programming in C language. (Dedicated development
environment necessary)
Edit on a personal computer
Parts displayed on NC
(example)
Memory card
NC Designer
Servo Selection Tool
By selecting the machine
configuration model and
inputting the machine
specifications, the optimal servo
motor meeting specifications
can be selected. Other selection
functions which fully support
drive system selection are also
available. This tool is free of
charge. Please contact us.
Main functions
Servo motor capacity selection, regenerative resistor capacity selection, spindle
acceleration/deceleration time calculation, power supply capacity selection, power supply
facility capacity calculation, etc.
When the machine model and input
specifications are selected,
the selection result for the motor will
be displayed.
The result can be output in PDF
format.
NC Configurator2
Parameter Setup Support Tool
The NC data file necessary for NC control and machine
operation (such as parameters, tool data and common
variables) can be edited on a personal computer.
Please contact us to purchase a full function version. (A
limited function version is also available free of charge.)
NC Configurator2
Ethernet
communication
GX Developer
Sequence Programming Tool
The MELSEC programming tool, offering a wide array of
functions and easy use, allows for convenient program
design and debugging. Linking with a simulator or
other utility allows for the efficient creation of desired
programs.
GX Developer
Ethernet
communication
Memory card
USB memory
NC Explorer
Data Transfer Tool
By connecting the NC and host personal computer via
Ethernet, data such as machining programs can easily
be shared.
This tool is free of charge. Please contact us.
NC1 NC2 NC3
NC4
Machining program
Ethernet
NC5 NC6
NC Explorer
NC Trainer/NC Trainer plus
MITSUBISHI CNC Training Tool
• NC Trainer is an application for operating the screens
of MITSUBISHI CNC M700V/M70V/E70 Series and
machining programs. This application can be used for
learning operating CNC and checking the operations
of the machining programs.
• NC Trainer plus can also be used for checking the
PLC program and custom screens.
NC Trainer NC Trainer plus
NC Analyzer
Servo Adjustment Support Tool
Servo parameters can be automatically adjusted
by activating the motor using machining programs
for adjustment or vibration signals, and measuring/
analyzing the machine characteristics.
Main functions
Bode diagram measurement display, speed loop gain adjustment, position loop gain
adjustment, notch filter setting, acceleration/deceleration time constant adjustment,
circularity adjustment and servo waveform measurement
NC Analyzer
Ethernet
communication
NC Monitor
Remote Monitoring Tool
An identical NC display screen can be displayed on a
personal computer. By connecting a personal computer
to the NC unit when necessary, various data can be
checked and set using the same HMI as the standard
NC screen.
Ethernet
communication
NC Monitor (M700V, M70V,E70)
* MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
* Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
* CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

133 134133 134
GlobalServiceNetwork
GlobalServiceNetwork
Global Service Network
AMERICA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA
CENTER)Central Region Service Center
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A.TEL:
+1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Michigan Service Satellite
ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Ohio Service Satellite
LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
CINCINATTI, OHIO 45201, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Minnesota Service Satellite
ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
West Region Service Center
16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Northern CA Satellite
SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Pennsylvania Service Satellite
PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA 15644, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531
Connecticut Service Satellite
TORRINGTON, CONNECTICUT 06790, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531
South Region Service Center
1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A.
TEL +1-678-258-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519
Texas Service Satellites
GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Tennessee Service Satellite
Nashville, Tennessee, 37201, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Florida Service Satellite
WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Canada Region Service Center
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935
Canada Service Satellite
EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935
Mexico Region Service Center
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO
TEL: +52-55-3067-7500 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649
Monterrey Service Satellite
MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICOTEL: +52-81-8365-4171
EUROPE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
Germany Service Center
KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141
France Service Center DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
France (Lyon) Service Satellite
DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
Italy Service Center
VIALE COLLEONI, 7 - CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO
INGRESSO 1
20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB), ITALY
TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
Italy (Padova) Service Satellite
VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY
TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
U.K. Branch
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
Spain Service Center
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420
08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
Poland Service Center
UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A.Ş Ümraniye Şubesi
Turkey Service Center
ŞERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775
ÜMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY
TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
Czech Republic Service Center
KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC
TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
Russia Service Center
213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (SCANDINAVIA)
Sweden Service Center
HAMMARBACKEN 14 191 49 SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN
TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877
Bulgaria Service Center
4 A.LYAPCHEV BOUL., POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA
TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061
Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center
APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721
Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center
4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE
TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366
Belarus Service Center
OFFICE 9, NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS
TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
South Africa Service Center
5 ALBATROSS STREET, RHODESFIELD, KEMPTON PARK 1619, GAUTENG, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
BRAZIL
MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e Serviços S.A
Brazil Region Service Center
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911
OCEANIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD.
Australia Service Center
348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
INDIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD.
India Service Center
2nd FLOOR, TOWER A B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY,
DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA
TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399
Ludhiana satellite office
Jamshedpur satellite office
India (Pune) Service Center
EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE – 411 026,
MAHARASHTRA, INDIA
TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100
Baroda satellite office
Mumbai satellite office
India (Bangalore) Service Center
PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2,
LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE - 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA
TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699
Chennai satellite office
Coimbatore satellite office
KOREA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
Korea Service Center
1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
Korea Taegu Service Satellite
4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA
TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411
TAIWAN
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)
Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center (Central Area)
NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST.,
TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center (North Area)
10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN
R.O.C.
TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433
Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center (South Area)
11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
ASEAN
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE
159943
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439
Malaysia (KL) Service Center
60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN,
MALAYSIA
TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636
Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center
17 17A, JALAN IMPIAN EMAS 5/5, TAMAN IMPIAN EMAS, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR
MALAYSIA.
TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404
Philippines Service Center
UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417
CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
China (Shanghai) Service Center
1-3, 5-10, 18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,
SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-3000
China (Ningbo) Service Dealer
China (Wuxi) Service Dealer
China (Jinan) Service Dealer
China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer
China (Wuhan) Service Satellite
China (Beijing) Service Center
9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE,
DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA
TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
China (Beijing) Service Dealer
China (Tianjin) Service Center
UNIT 2003, TIANJIN CITY TOWER, NO 35 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,
TIANJIN 300061, CHINA
TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
China (Shenyang) Service Satellite
China (Changchun) Service Satellite
China (Chengdu) Service Center
ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG
ROAD,
JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA
TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630
China (Shenzhen) Service Center
ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE,
JINTIAN RD.S.,
FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA
TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
China (Xiamen) Service Dealer
China (Dongguan) Service Dealer
VIETNAM
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD
Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center
UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET,
DISTRICT 1, HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM
TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5946
Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Satellite
SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG
KIET STREET,
HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM
TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076
INDONESIA
PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA
Indonesia Service Center
GEDUNG JAYA 11TH FLOOR, JL. MH. THAMRIN NO.12, JAKARTA PUSAT 10340,
INDONESIA
TEL: +62-21-3192-6461 / FAX: +62-21-3192-3942
THAILAND
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO.,LTD
Thailand Service Center
12TH FLOOR, SV.CITY BUILDING, OFFICE TOWER 1, NO. 896/19 AND 20 RAMA 3
ROAD,
KWAENG BANGPONGPANG, KHET YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120,THAILAND
TEL: +66-2-682-6522-31 / FAX: +66-2-682-6020

BNP-A1225-B[ENG]
NCSpecificationSelectionGuide(ENGLISH)
BNP-A1225-B[ENG]
(ENGLISH)
K-KL2-3-C0099-B NA1403 Printed in Japan (MDOC)
Revised publication, effective Mar. 2014.
Superseding publication of K-KL2-3-C0099-A Apr. 2013.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mitsubishi cnc nc specification selection guide e70-m70 v-m700v series

More Related Content

What's hot (20)

Similar to Mitsubishi cnc nc specification selection guide e70-m70 v-m700v series (20)

More from Dien Ha The (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Mitsubishi cnc nc specification selection guide e70-m70 v-m700v series